Category: Pandemic

  • MIL-OSI United Kingdom: Director of education support companies jailed after spending £200,000 in Covid loans ‘as he saw fit’

    Source: United Kingdom – Government Statements

    Press release

    Director of education support companies jailed after spending £200,000 in Covid loans ‘as he saw fit’

    Bounce Back Loan fraudster convicted after Insolvency Service investigations

    • Ricky Harrison fraudulently obtained four Covid Bounce Back Loans, including three for dormant companies 

    • Money from the loans was used by Harrison for his own personal benefit and he attempted to avoid having to make any repayments by applying to have all four of his companies struck-off the Companies House register 

    • Harrison has been sentenced to more than three years in prison following Insolvency Service investigations into his conduct

    A director who secured maximum-value Covid loans for three dormant companies and overstated his turnover to secure a fourth during the pandemic has been jailed. 

    Ricky Harrison received a total of £200,000 in Bounce Back Loans during 2020, when he was entitled to just £16,000 at most. He also spent the money for personal purposes, not for business use as was required. 

    Three of his companies, Hackney Works Ltd, Tower Hamlets Works Ltd and Ricky Harrison Holdings Ltd, were not trading at the time he made his fraudulent applications to the bank. 

    The 41-year-old also exaggerated his turnover by more than £150,000 for a fourth company, Newham Works Ltd. 

    Harrison, of Beacon Court, Hertford Heath, Hertfordshire, was sentenced to three years and two months in prison when he appeared at St Albans Crown Court on Friday 25 April. 

    He was also disqualified as a director for 10 years. 

    David Snasdell, Chief Investigator at the Insolvency Service, said:

    Ricky Harrison’s actions were deeply cynical. He exploited an opportunity to help himself to taxpayers’ money during what was a national emergency. 

    Harrison did not co-operate with Insolvency Service investigations, failing to attend a pre-arranged interview and instead producing a typed statement where he implausibly claimed he was entitled to all the loans and was at liberty to spend the funds as he saw fit. 

    The reality is that Harrison was not entitled to the vast majority of the money he received and was required to spend the funds for the economic benefit of his business.  

    This was public money and we will continue to prosecute those who made such obvious false representations to secure Covid support.

    Harrison’s four companies were incorporated within a three-week period in December 2018 and January 2019. 

    Hackney Works, Tower Hamlets Works, and Newham Works were all described on Companies House as providing “educational support services”. Ricky Harrison Holdings was described as a holding company. 

    Only Newham Works appeared to have any trading income in 2019. 

    Harrison himself admitted to an accountant that Hackney Works and Tower Hamlets Works were dormant and that there was no need to prepare any accounts for them. 

    Analysis of the accounts of Ricky Harrison Holdings revealed no evidence that the company had begun trading in its own right. 

    Despite this, Harrison falsely declared the companies had an annual turnover of £245,000, £232,000, and £315,000 respectively when he made the applications for three £50,000 Bounce Back Loans across a two-day period in May 2020.  

    At the same time, Harrison made a fraudulent application for a £50,000 Bounce Back Loan for Newham Works. He declared on the application form that the company’s turnover was £215,000 when it was actually only £64,000. 

    Harrison transferred some of the money he received to his other companies, including Newham Works, and paid a percentage into his own personal account. 

    A total of £85,000 also appeared to be used for the purchase of a vehicle in June 2020. 

    Harrison told the bank he would repay the funds, as was required under the terms of the scheme. 

    However, in July 2020, just weeks after securing the loans, Harrison applied to have Hackney Works and Tower Hamlets Works struck-off the Companies House register. 

    Harrison subsequently attempted to strike-off Ricky Harrison Holdings and Newham Works in 2021 but was unsuccessful. 

    No loan repayments were made by Harrison aside from a single payment of £833.

    Further information

    Updates to this page

    Published 28 April 2025

    MIL OSI United Kingdom

  • MIL-OSI: Roper Technologies announces first quarter financial results

    Source: GlobeNewswire (MIL-OSI)

    SARASOTA, Fla., April 28, 2025 (GLOBE NEWSWIRE) — Roper Technologies, Inc. (Nasdaq: ROP) reported financial results for the first quarter ended March 31, 2025.

    First quarter 2025 highlights

    • Revenue increased 12% to $1.88 billion; acquisition contribution was +8% and organic revenue was +5%
    • GAAP net earnings decreased 13% to $331 million; adjusted net earnings increased 9% to $517 million
    • Adjusted EBITDA increased 9% to $740 million
    • Operating cash flow decreased 1% to $529 million; trailing-twelve-months adjusted operating cash flow increased 12% to $2.39 billion
    • GAAP DEPS decreased 14% to $3.06; adjusted DEPS increased 8% to $4.78

    “Roper had a strong start to 2025 and our enterprise continues to execute at a high level,” said Neil Hunn, Roper’s President and CEO. “Our total revenue growth of 12% was driven by an 8% acquisition contribution and 5% organic growth. Importantly, our trailing-twelve-months free cash flow grew 12% with a 31% free cash flow margin. Last week, we completed the acquisition of CentralReach, a leading provider of cloud-native software enabling the workflow and administration of Applied Behavior Analysis therapy. CentralReach is a terrific business that not only meets each of our historical acquisition criteria but also meets our higher growth and higher return expectations.”

    “Despite an uncertain macroeconomic backdrop, we are increasing our full year outlook. This is underpinned by resilient demand for our mission critical solutions and our expanding recurring revenue base. Additionally, we are well positioned to continue executing our disciplined and process-driven capital deployment strategy, fueled by our significant M&A firepower and a large pipeline of attractive acquisition opportunities. Roper’s durable cash flow compounding model has historically performed well through economic and market cycles, and we expect our resilience will again be demonstrated in the current environment,” concluded Mr. Hunn.

    Increasing 2025 guidance

    Roper now expects full year 2025 adjusted DEPS of $19.80 – $20.05, compared to previous guidance of $19.75 – $20.00. The Company increased its full year total revenue growth outlook to ~12%, compared to a previous outlook of 10%+, and continues to expect organic revenue growth of +6 – 7%.

    For the second quarter of 2025, the Company expects adjusted DEPS of $4.80 – $4.84.

    Roper’s guidance includes the impact of the previously announced acquisition of CentralReach, which closed on April 23, 2025. The Company’s guidance excludes the impact of unannounced future acquisitions or divestitures.

    Conference call to be held at 8:00 AM (ET) today

    A conference call to discuss these results has been scheduled for 8:00 AM ET on Monday, April 28, 2025. The call can be accessed via webcast or by dialing +1 800-836-8184 (US/Canada) or +1 646-357-8785, using conference call ID 07867. Webcast information and conference call materials will be made available in the Investors section of Roper’s website (www.ropertech.com) prior to the start of the call. The webcast can also be accessed directly by using the following URL https://event.webcast. Telephonic replays will be available for up to two weeks and can be accessed by dialing +1 646-517-4150 with access code 07867#.

    Use of non-GAAP financial information

    The Company supplements its consolidated financial statements presented on a GAAP basis with certain non-GAAP financial information to provide investors with greater insight, increase transparency and allow for a more comprehensive understanding of the information used by management in its financial and operational decision-making. Reconciliation of non-GAAP measures to their most directly comparable GAAP measures are included in the accompanying financial schedules or tables. The non-GAAP financial measures disclosed by the Company should not be considered a substitute for, or superior to, financial measures prepared in accordance with GAAP, and the financial results prepared in accordance with GAAP and reconciliations from these results should be carefully evaluated.

    Minority interest

    Following the sale of a majority stake in its industrial businesses to CD&R, Roper holds a minority interest in Indicor. The fair value of Roper’s equity investment in Indicor is updated on a quarterly basis and reported as “equity investments (gain) loss, net.” Roper makes non-GAAP adjustments for the impacts associated with this investment.

    Table 1: Revenue and adjusted EBITDA reconciliation ($M)
      Q1 2024   Q1 2025   V %
    GAAP revenue $ 1,681     $ 1,883     12 %
               
    Components of revenue growth          
    Organic         5 %
    Acquisitions         8 %
    Foreign exchange         %
    Revenue growth         12 %
               
    Adjusted EBITDA reconciliation          
    GAAP net earnings $ 382     $ 331      
    Taxes   102       87      
    Interest expense   53       63      
    Depreciation   9       9      
    Amortization   185       204      
    EBITDA $ 731     $ 694     (5)%
               
    Transaction-related expenses for completed
    acquisitions
      2       1      
    Financial impacts associated with the minority
    investments in Indicor & Certinia
      (57 )     44   A  
    Adjusted EBITDA $ 676     $ 740     9 %
    Adjusted EBITDA margin   40.2 %     39.3 %   (90 bps)
                       
    Table 2: Adjusted net earnings reconciliation ($M)
      Q1 2024   Q1 2025   V %
    GAAP net earnings $ 382     $ 331   (13)%
    Transaction-related expenses for completed
    acquisitions
      1       1    
    Financial impacts associated with the minority
    investments in Indicor & Certinia
      (48 )     32 A  
    Amortization of acquisition-related intangible
    assets
      141       154 B  
    Adjusted net earnings C $ 476     $ 517   9 %
               
    Table 3: Adjusted DEPS reconciliation
      Q1 2024   Q1 2025   V %
    GAAP DEPS $ 3.54     $ 3.06   (14)%
    Transaction-related expenses for completed
    acquisitions
      0.01       0.01    
    Financial impacts associated with the minority
    investments in Indicor & Certinia
      (0.45 )     0.29 A  
    Amortization of acquisition-related intangible
    assets
      1.31       1.42 B  
    Adjusted DEPSC $ 4.41     $ 4.78   8 %
               
    Table 4: Adjusted cash flow reconciliation ($M)
    (from continuing operations)
       
      Q1 2024   Q1 2025   V %     TTM 2024   TTM 2025   V %
    Operating cash flow $ 531     $ 529     (1)%     $ 2,104     $ 2,390     14 %
    Taxes paid in period
    related to divestiture
                        32            
    Adjusted operating cash
    flow
    $ 531     $ 529     (1)%     $ 2,136     $ 2,390     12 %
    Capital expenditures   (9 )     (10 )           (68 )     (66 )    
    Capitalized software
    expenditures
      (10 )     (12 )           (40 )     (48 )    
    Adjusted free cash flow $ 513     $ 507     (1)%     $ 2,029     $ 2,276     12 %
                             
    Table 5: Forecasted adjusted DEPS reconciliation
      Q2 2025   FY 2025
      Low end   High end   Low end   High end
    GAAP DEPS D $ 3.33   $ 3.37   $ 13.72   $ 13.97
    YTD transaction-related expenses for
    completed acquisitions
              0.01     0.01
    YTD financial impacts associated with the
    minority investment in Indicor A
              0.29     0.29
    Amortization of acquisition-related
    intangible assets B
      1.47     1.47     5.78     5.78
    Adjusted DEPS C $ 4.80   $ 4.84   $ 19.80   $ 20.05
                   

    Footnotes:

    A. Adjustments related to the financial impacts associated with the minority investment in Indicor as shown below ($M, except per share data). Forecasted results do not include any potential impacts associated with our minority investment in Indicor, as these potential impacts cannot be reasonably predicted. These impacts will be excluded from all non-GAAP results in future periods.
                         
        Q1 2025A     Q2 2025E   FY 2025E     YTD 2025A
      Pretax $ 44     TBD   TBD     $ 44
      After-tax $ 32     TBD   TBD     $ 32
      Per share $ 0.29     TBD   TBD     $ 0.29
                         
    B. Actual results and forecast of estimated amortization of acquisition-related intangible assets as shown below ($M, except per share data).
                         
        Q1 2025A     Q2 2025E   FY 2025E      
      Pretax $ 194     $ 202   $ 795      
      After-tax $ 154     $ 160   $ 628      
      Per share $ 1.42     $ 1.47   $ 5.78      
                         
    C. All actual and forecasted non-GAAP adjustments are taxed at 21% with the exception of the financial impacts associated with minority investments.
                         
    D. Forecasted GAAP DEPS do not include any potential impacts associated with our minority investment in Indicor. These impacts will be excluded from all non-GAAP results in future periods.
       

    Note: Numbers may not foot due to rounding.

    About Roper Technologies

    Roper Technologies is a constituent of the Nasdaq 100, S&P 500, and Fortune 1000. Roper has a proven, long-term track record of compounding cash flow and shareholder value. The Company operates market leading businesses that design and develop vertical software and technology enabled products for a variety of defensible niche markets. Roper utilizes a disciplined, analytical, and process-driven approach to redeploy its excess capital toward high-quality acquisitions. Additional information about Roper is available on the Company’s website at www.ropertech.com.

    Contact information:
    Investor Relations
    941-556-2601
    investor-relations@ropertech.com

    The information provided in this press release contains forward-looking statements within the meaning of the federal securities laws. These forward-looking statements may include, among others, statements regarding operating results, the success of our internal operating plans, and the prospects for newly acquired businesses to be integrated and contribute to future growth, profit and cash flow expectations. Forward-looking statements may be indicated by words or phrases such as “anticipate,” “estimate,” “plans,” “expects,” “projects,” “should,” “will,” “believes,” “intends” and similar words and phrases. These statements reflect management’s current beliefs and are not guarantees of future performance. They involve risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from those contained in any forward-looking statement. Such risks and uncertainties include our ability to identify and complete acquisitions consistent with our business strategies, integrate acquisitions that have been completed, realize expected benefits and synergies from, and manage other risks associated with, acquired businesses, including obtaining any required regulatory approvals with respect thereto. We also face other general risks, including our ability to realize cost savings from our operating initiatives, general economic conditions and the conditions of the specific markets in which we operate, including risks related to labor shortages and rising interest rates, changes in foreign exchange rates, risks related to changing U.S. and foreign trade policies, including increased trade restrictions or tariffs, risks associated with our international operations, cybersecurity and data privacy risks, including litigation resulting therefrom, risks related to political instability, armed hostilities, incidents of terrorism, public health crises (such as the COVID-19 pandemic) or natural disasters, increased product liability and insurance costs, increased warranty exposure, future competition, changes in the supply of, or price for, parts and components, including as a result of inflation and potential supply chain constraints, environmental compliance costs and liabilities, risks and cost associated with litigation, potential write-offs of our substantial intangible assets, and risks associated with obtaining governmental approvals and maintaining regulatory compliance for new and existing products. Important risks may be discussed in current and subsequent filings with the SEC. You should not place undue reliance on any forward-looking statements. These statements speak only as of the date they are made, and we undertake no obligation to update publicly any of them in light of new information or future events.

    # # #

    Roper Technologies, Inc.      
    Condensed Consolidated Balance Sheets (unaudited)    
    (Amounts in millions)      
           
      March 31, 2025   December 31, 2024
    ASSETS:      
           
    Cash and cash equivalents $ 372.8     $ 188.2  
    Accounts receivable, net   813.3       885.1  
    Inventories, net   125.5       120.8  
    Income taxes receivable   20.3       25.6  
    Unbilled receivables   135.7       127.3  
    Prepaid expenses and other current assets   237.0       195.7  
    Total current assets   1,704.6       1,542.7  
           
    Property, plant and equipment, net   150.0       149.7  
    Goodwill   19,408.2       19,312.9  
    Other intangible assets, net   8,916.9       9,059.6  
    Deferred taxes   54.7       54.1  
    Equity investment   728.2       772.3  
    Other assets   456.2       443.4  
    Total assets $ 31,418.8     $ 31,334.7  
           
    LIABILITIES AND STOCKHOLDERS’ EQUITY:      
           
    Accounts payable $ 152.8     $ 148.1  
    Accrued compensation   179.1       289.0  
    Deferred revenue   1,667.9       1,737.4  
    Other accrued liabilities   544.5       546.2  
    Income taxes payable   144.3       68.4  
    Current portion of long-term debt, net   999.4       1,043.1  
    Total current liabilities   3,688.0       3,832.2  
           
    Long-term debt, net of current portion   6,457.0       6,579.9  
    Deferred taxes   1,611.6       1,630.6  
    Other liabilities   438.6       424.4  
    Total liabilities   12,195.2       12,467.1  
           
    Common stock   1.1       1.1  
    Additional paid-in capital   3,108.7       3,014.6  
    Retained earnings   16,276.9       16,034.9  
    Accumulated other comprehensive loss   (146.8 )     (166.5 )
    Treasury stock   (16.3 )     (16.5 )
    Total stockholders’ equity   19,223.6       18,867.6  
    Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity $ 31,418.8     $ 31,334.7  
           
    Roper Technologies, Inc.      
    Condensed Consolidated Statements of Earnings (unaudited)      
    (Amounts in millions, except per share data)      
           
      Three months ended
    March 31,
        2025     2024  
    Net revenues $ 1,882.8   $ 1,680.7  
    Cost of sales   589.1     499.7  
    Gross profit   1,293.7     1,181.0  
           
    Selling, general and administrative expenses   767.9     699.7  
    Income from operations   525.8     481.3  
           
    Interest expense, net   62.9     53.2  
    Equity investments (gain) loss, net   44.4     (57.0 )
    Other expense, net   0.5     1.2  
           
    Earnings before income taxes   418.0     483.9  
           
    Income taxes   86.9     101.9  
           
    Net earnings $ 331.1   $ 382.0  
           
    Net earnings per share:      
    Basic $ 3.08   $ 3.57  
    Diluted $ 3.06   $ 3.54  
           
    Weighted average common shares outstanding:      
    Basic   107.4     107.0  
    Diluted   108.2     107.9  
                 
    Roper Technologies, Inc.              
    Selected Segment Financial Data (unaudited)              
    (Amounts in millions; percentages of net revenues)              
                   
      Three months ended March 31,
       2025     2024 
      Amount   %   Amount   %
    Net revenues:              
    Application Software $ 1,068.2       $ 895.2    
    Network Software   375.9         370.8    
    Technology Enabled Products   438.7         414.7    
    Total $ 1,882.8       $ 1,680.7    
                   
                   
    Gross profit:              
    Application Software $ 720.8   67.5 %   $ 625.7   69.9 %
    Network Software   315.6   84.0 %     316.3   85.3 %
    Technology Enabled Products   257.3   58.7 %     239.0   57.6 %
    Total $ 1,293.7   68.7 %   $ 1,181.0   70.3 %
                   
                   
    Operating profit*:              
    Application Software $ 276.8   25.9 %   $ 239.6   26.8 %
    Network Software   166.7   44.3 %     167.0   45.0 %
    Technology Enabled Products   153.6   35.0 %     136.2   32.8 %
    Total $ 597.1   31.7 %   $ 542.8   32.3 %
                   
                   
    * Segment operating profit is before unallocated corporate general and administrative expenses and enterprise-wide stock-based compensation. These expenses were $71.3 and $61.5 for the three months ended March 31, 2025 and 2024, respectively.
     
    Roper Technologies, Inc.  
    Condensed Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows (unaudited)
    (Amounts in millions)
      Three months ended
    March 31,
        2025       2024  
    Cash flows from operating activities:      
    Net earnings $ 331.1     $ 382.0  
    Adjustments to reconcile net earnings to cash flows from operating
    activities:
         
    Depreciation and amortization of property, plant and equipment   9.1       9.2  
    Amortization of intangible assets   204.0       185.0  
    Amortization of deferred financing costs   2.8       2.2  
    Non-cash stock compensation   38.8       33.6  
    Equity investments (gain) loss, net   44.4       (57.0 )
    Income tax provision   86.9       101.9  
    Changes in operating assets and liabilities, net of acquired businesses:      
    Accounts receivable   74.4       79.4  
    Unbilled receivables   (7.6 )     (12.2 )
    Inventories   (4.1 )     (7.9 )
    Prepaid expenses and other current assets   (41.3 )     (26.8 )
    Accounts payable   2.9       0.3  
    Other accrued liabilities   (107.4 )     (69.3 )
    Deferred revenue   (70.6 )     (70.5 )
    Cash income taxes paid   (29.1 )     (19.0 )
    Other, net   (5.6 )     0.6  
    Cash provided by operating activities   528.7       531.5  
           
    Cash flows used in investing activities:      
    Acquisitions of businesses, net of cash acquired   (124.9 )     (1,858.7 )
    Capital expenditures   (9.5 )     (9.3 )
    Capitalized software expenditures   (12.4 )     (9.6 )
    Other         (1.0 )
    Cash used in investing activities   (146.8 )     (1,878.6 )
           
    Cash flows from (used in) financing activities:      
    Borrowings (payments) under revolving line of credit, net   (125.0 )     1,390.0  
    Cash dividends to stockholders   (88.6 )     (80.5 )
    Proceeds from stock-based compensation, net   42.7       21.7  
    Treasury stock sales   7.2       5.8  
    Other, net   (44.1 )     (0.1 )
    Cash provided by (used in) financing activities   (207.8 )     1,336.9  
           
    Effect of exchange rate changes on cash   10.5       (5.7 )
           
    Net increase (decrease) in cash and cash equivalents   184.6       (15.9 )
           
    Cash and cash equivalents, beginning of period   188.2       214.3  
           
    Cash and cash equivalents, end of period $ 372.8     $ 198.4  
           

    The MIL Network

  • MIL-OSI: EBC Financial Group Deepens Commitment to United to Beat Malaria with Renewed Global Partnership and First-Ever 5K Run Sponsorship

    Source: GlobeNewswire (MIL-OSI)

    WASHINGTON, April 28, 2025 (GLOBE NEWSWIRE) — As the world marks World Malaria Day 2025 under the theme “Malaria Ends With Us: Reinvest, Reimagine, Reignite,” EBC Financial Group (EBC) is renewing its global partnership with the United Nations Foundation’s United to Beat Malaria campaign. Now entering its second year of collaboration, EBC is scaling up its impact through increased corporate sponsorship, cross-border employee mobilisation to raise awareness, and direct investment in frontline health tools that save lives.

    From a shared belief that no child should die from a mosquito bite, EBC is transforming its role from ally to active advocate—supporting both the global systems that drive malaria eradication and the grassroots initiatives that protect the world’s most vulnerable communities. As part of this commitment, EBC is stepping up as a first-time corporate sponsor of the Move Against Malaria 5K 2025 event, mobilising many in a global movement to raise awareness for one of the world’s deadliest—yet entirely preventable—diseases.

    “In 2024, we stood in solidarity. In 2025, we stand in action,” said David Barrett, CEO of EBC Financial Group (UK) Ltd. “This campaign is now embedded into our leadership strategy and employee culture. This is not a moment, it’s a movement.”

    EBC’s Commitment to Global Health Equity is a Shared Mission
    To mark this renewed partnership, Barrett sat down with Margaret McDonnell, Executive Director of United to Beat Malaria, for a candid 40-minute fireside chat. Their conversation explored the urgent need for global solidarity, the personal and professional impact of the campaign, and why EBC has chosen to walk alongside this cause—literally and figuratively.

    “The first year for me was a complete revelation in terms of how advocacy for this mission worked—not only in America but globally,” said Barrett. “This year, it was different. The politics have shifted, and the challenges have changed. But if anything, that makes this mission even more important.”

    As a global financial institution with operations in Africa, Latin America, and Asia—regions disproportionately affected by malaria—EBC views this fight as both urgent and deeply personal.

    “We have offices in Africa, Latin America, and Asia where malaria is a very real, on-ground problem. Supporting this campaign is a natural progression, resonating with our people and the communities we work in,” Barrett said. “At the beginning, it was something of interest. But the more you learn about the lives this movement has saved, the more you realise you’ve got to keep going.”

    McDonnell echoed the importance of having private sector allies like EBC on board, praising the company’s commitment to both the summit and the broader mission. “We appreciate that a company like EBC—though not in public health—recognises the impact of malaria on your workforce, clients, and communities,” said McDonnell. “Malaria isn’t just a health issue. It’s an economic issue, a workforce issue, and a strategic global issue.”

    Barrett also emphasised the ripple effect of even small funding disruptions: “If you break that chain, the progress and investment just unravel. These initiatives require macro thinking. If we keep looking only at the next quarter, we risk losing decades of momentum,” he added.

    Raising Voices at the 2025 United to Beat Malaria Annual Leadership Summit
    In March 2025, Barrett and EBC’s APAC Director of Operations, Samuel Hertz, joined over 120 passionate advocates at the United to Beat Malaria Annual Leadership Summit in Washington, D.C.—a three-day gathering of Champions, policymakers, scientists, students, and private sector leaders united by a common goal: ending malaria for good.

    The summit culminated in direct advocacy on Capitol Hill, where Barrett and Hertz met with members of Congress to push for full funding of the President’s Malaria Initiative (PMI), the Global Fund to Fight AIDS, Tuberculosis and Malaria, and the UN’s malaria-related programs. EBC stood with a network of global partners, amplifying the message that stable investment and strategic collaboration are essential to driving continued progress, alongside Beat Malaria Champions, a highlight of the summit.

    “What stood out most was the passion of the Champions,” said Barrett. “From students to scientists, their energy is contagious. They’re not just learning—they’re leading. And that gives me hope that a healthier, more just world is truly possible.”

    Hertz added, “Being able to walk into the halls of Congress alongside these dedicated Champions—people who are educating communities, building coalitions, and pushing policy forward—was a powerful reminder that advocacy works. EBC was proud to represent the private sector in this movement, and even prouder to walk beside the changemakers driving it.”

    More Than a Run: EBC Rallies a Worldwide Workforce to Move Against Malaria
    EBC is once again joining the global Move Against Malaria 5K—a virtual challenge running from April 25 to May 10 that invites participants around the world to walk, run, cycle, or move in any way to support malaria prevention efforts.

    While EBC actively participated in the campaign last year, 2025 marks the company’s first year as an official corporate sponsor, highlighting its deepened commitment to both advocacy and action. This step forward reflects EBC’s evolving role in supporting frontline initiatives and raising awareness, with more than 200 EBC employees across the UK, Asia, Africa, and Latin America pledging to take part—mobilising teams, engaging their communities—and helping to raise vital funds.

    Fuelling Frontline Impact through Purposeful Investment
    EBC is directing its investment toward life-saving malaria interventions, including insecticide-treated bed nets, rapid diagnostic tests, and antimalarial treatments. These contributions will be directed toward frontline health programs in Sub-Saharan Africa, Latin America and the Caribbean regions that bear the highest burden of malaria worldwide.

    “This partnership goes beyond corporate philanthropy, it reflects a shared mission to protect the world’s most vulnerable populations,” said McDonnell.

    Aligned with its broader Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR) and Environmental, Social, and Governance (ESG) strategies, EBC continues to explore deeper collaborations with UN-affiliated organisations and global health partners to maximise its impact in the developing world. “As a global financial institution, we recognise that sustainable growth is inseparable from global well-being,” added Hertz. “In the fight against malaria, we are not only donors—we are advocates, allies, and catalysts for change.”

    In 2024 alone, United to Beat Malaria helped protect over 1.67 million people from malaria across vulnerable communities worldwide—an achievement made possible through the collective support of partners like EBC Financial Group. Registrations and donations are available via https://fundraise.unfoundation.org/event/move-against-malaria-5k-2025/e654861.

    These efforts spanned five high-risk African nations—DR Congo, Ethiopia, Nigeria, South Sudan, and Uganda—and supported malaria elimination programs across 20 Latin American and Caribbean countries, where vulnerable populations continue to face daily risks due to limited healthcare access, displacement, and ongoing conflict.

    Yet the fight is far from over. According to the World Health Organization (WHO)’s World Malaria Report 2024, malaria sickened an estimated 263 million people and claimed more than 597,000 lives—most of them children under the age of five. These are lives we can save—with continued global action, private sector leadership, and unwavering support from the international community.

    Together, with the United to Beat Malaria campaign, EBC is proud to stand at the forefront of a global movement to end malaria for good. For more information about EBC Financial Group’s CSR initiatives, please visit www.ebc.com/ESG.

    About EBC Financial Group

    Founded in London’s esteemed financial district, EBC Financial Group (EBC) is renowned for its expertise in financial brokerage and asset management. With offices in key financial hubs—including London, Sydney, Hong Kong, Singapore, the Cayman Islands, Bangkok, Limassol, and emerging markets in Latin America, Asia, and Africa—EBC enables retail, professional, and institutional investors to access a wide range of global markets and trading opportunities, including currencies, commodities, shares, and indices.

    Recognised with multiple awards, EBC is committed to upholding ethical standards and these subsidiaries are licensed and regulated within their respective jurisdictions. EBC Financial Group (UK) Limited is regulated by the UK’s Financial Conduct Authority (FCA); EBC Financial Group (Cayman) Limited is regulated by the Cayman Islands Monetary Authority (CIMA); EBC Financial Group (Australia) Pty Ltd, and EBC Asset Management Pty Ltd are regulated by Australia’s Securities and Investments Commission (ASIC); EBC Financial (MU) Ltd is authorised and regulated by the Financial Services Commission Mauritius (FSC).

    At the core of EBC are a team of industry veterans with over 40 years of experience in major financial institutions. Having navigated key economic cycles from the Plaza Accord and 2015 Swiss franc crisis to the market upheavals of the COVID-19 pandemic. We foster a culture where integrity, respect, and client asset security are paramount, ensuring that every investor relationship is handled with the utmost seriousness it deserves.

    As the Official Foreign Exchange Partner of FC Barcelona, EBC provides specialised services across Asia, LATAM, the Middle East, Africa, and Oceania. Through its partnership with the UN Foundation and United to Beat Malaria, the company contributes to global health initiatives. EBC also supports the ‘What Economists Really Do’ public engagement series by Oxford University’s Department of Economics, helping to demystify economics and its application to major societal challenges, fostering greater public understanding and dialogue.

    https://www.ebc.com/

    About UN Foundation’s United to Beat Malaria

    For over 25 years, the UN Foundation has built novel innovations and partnerships to support the United Nations and help solve global problems at scale. As an independent charitable organization, the Foundation was created to work closely with the United Nations to address humanity’s greatest challenges and drive global progress. Learn more at www.unfoundation.org.

    The UN Foundation’s United to Beat Malaria campaign brings together key and diverse partners and supporters to take urgent action to end malaria and create a healthier, more equitable world. Since 2006, United to Beat Malaria has worked to equip and mobilize citizens across the U.S. and around the world to raise awareness, funds and voices. The campaign works with partners in endemic countries to channel life-saving resources to protect the most marginalized and vulnerable populations. By championing increased leadership, political will and resources from the U.S. and beyond, as well as more holistic, innovative tools and strategies, we can be the generation that ends malaria once and for all.

    Learn more at www.beatmalaria.org.

    Media Contact:
    Savitha Ravindran
    Global Public Relations Manager
    savitha.ravindran@ebc.com

    Chyna Elvina
    Global Public Relations Manager
    chyna.elvina@ebc.com

    Michelle Siow
    Brand Director
    michelle.siow@ebc.com

    Photos accompanying this announcement are available at:
    https://www.globenewswire.com/NewsRoom/AttachmentNg/d08d69f6-099b-47e6-a289-c4c8b0630935
    https://www.globenewswire.com/NewsRoom/AttachmentNg/2b4f4ac8-593b-417c-89c8-286a1b0f9731
    https://www.globenewswire.com/NewsRoom/AttachmentNg/b6d511c0-f811-4390-88b0-321f0bb04158

    The MIL Network

  • MIL-OSI United Kingdom: Community Risk Register

    Source: City of Sunderland

    Communities across Northumberland and Tyne and Wear have access to plans to respond to flooding, wildfires and other major incidents thanks to a new Community Risk Register.

    The Northumbria Local Resilience Forum (LRF) is a partnership made up of blue light services, local authorities, hospitals, health organisations and other public and private bodies across the North East.

    Each region has its own LRF with the partnerships ensuring a co-ordinated and effective response to any incident or event that impacts on communities.

    Much of the work takes place behind closed doors, with tests and exercises taking place among agencies to prepare their staff for any incident that may take place in our towns, cities and countryside.

    That could be a mass power outages, storms, wildfire or a pandemic, among other high impact events or major incidents that could take place at any time.

    The register includes details of those incidents identified as being of greater risk but also includes information on how communities themselves may prepare for them.

    Chair of the Northumbria LRF, Chief Fire Officer Peter Heath of Tyne and Wear Fire and Rescue Service (TWFRS), said the pandemic and recent extreme weather events demonstrate the value in communities being prepared.

    He said: “All the agencies represented in the LRF want to reassure our communities that we prepare for all eventualities and as a region our plans are well tested and co-ordinated.

     “Whatever the incident, we will be there to prioritise risk to life and ensure those in need receive the appropriate response from the appropriate agency.

     “In recent years we have seen Storm Arwen cause widespread disruption in our rural communities, wildfires lead to widespread destruction of nature reserves and a global pandemic that changed life as we know it.

     “The LRF was at the heart of our regional response but these are incidents that impacted on all communities and each incident has taught us a lesson in it’s own right.

     “One main theme is the preparedness of our communities, and how often residents will mobilise themselves to ensure the most vulnerable among us are supported. That community cohesion is what makes our region so great. 

     “Through the Community Risk Register residents can better prepare themselves for some of those high risk incidents.

     “As a partnership, we will be communicating advice and guidance on those risks identified in the register throughout the year so keep your eyes out and help us keep our communities safe.”

     You can find the Northumbria Community Risk Register on the Northumberland County Council website here: nland.uk/CRR

    MIL OSI United Kingdom

  • MIL-OSI USA: Governor Newsom on new DOGE action to dismantle AmeriCorps: ‘We will serve the federal government with a lawsuit’

    Source: US State of California 2

    Apr 25, 2025

    What you need to know: DOGE is ramping up its work to dismantle AmeriCorps. California will sue to stop it.

    SACRAMENTO – Governor Gavin Newsom today issued the following statement after California received notice from the federal government of termination of its AmeriCorps grant programs which support volunteer and service efforts.

    The federal government is giving the middle finger to service. We will serve them with a lawsuit.

    Governor Gavin Newsom

    Last week, Governor Newsom announced that as the Trump Administration dismantles the AmeriCorps service program, California will both challenge the illegal action in court and accelerate recruitment for the California Service Corps program — already the largest service corps in the nation, surpassing the size of the Peace Corps.

    When the devastating fires struck Los Angeles earlier this year, AmeriCorps members were on the ground, distributing supplies and supporting families. The agency’s shutdown hamstrings these efforts.

    California Service Corps is the largest service force in the nation, consisting of four paid service programs:   

    Combined, it is a force larger than the Peace Corps and is mobilized at a time when California is addressing post-pandemic academic recovery, rebuilding from the LA fires and planning for the future of the state’s workforce. The federal government provides more than half of the funding for California Climate Action Corps and about 5% of College Corps, while the state fully funds the Youth Service Corps.

    In the 2023-24 service year, 6,264 AmeriCorps members in California: 

    • Provided 4,397,674 hours of service
    • Tutored/mentored 73,833 students
    • Supported 17,000 foster youth with education and employment  
    • Planted 39,288 trees

    Members helped 26,000 households impacted by the LA fires and packed 21,000 food boxes.

    Press Releases, Recent News

    Recent news

    News SACRAMENTO – Governor Gavin Newsom today announced the following appointments:Suzanne Martindale, of Oakland, has been appointed Chief Deputy Commissioner at the California Department of Financial Protection and Innovation. Martindale has been the Senior Deputy…

    News What you need to know: More Californians than ever are connecting with earthquake warning services as the MyShake app reaches over 4 million downloads. SACRAMENTO – During Earthquake Preparedness Month, Governor Gavin Newsom today announced a major milestone: the…

    News What you need to know: California is working with state, local, and federal agencies in a historic project to repopulate the North Yuba River with native fish and help protect the state’s waterways and ecosystems.  MARYSVILLE – Governor Gavin Newsom announced a…

    MIL OSI USA News

  • MIL-OSI Asia-Pac: India Led with Compassion During COVID-19, Sharing 300 Million Vaccines Globally: Union Minister of Commerce & Industry Shri Piyush Goyal

    Source: Government of India

    India Led with Compassion During COVID-19, Sharing 300 Million Vaccines Globally: Union Minister of Commerce & Industry Shri Piyush Goyal

    Union Minister of Commerce & Industry Shri Piyush Goyal addresses World Health Summit Regional Meeting in New Delhi

    India’s vaccine diplomacy and Ayushman Bharat show commitment to global health equity, says Union Minister

    Govt committed towards ensuring public health, more than 620 million people are now eligible for free healthcare under the Ayushman Bharat scheme: Shri Goyal

    Posted On: 27 APR 2025 8:03PM by PIB Delhi

    Union Minister of Commerce & Industry, Shri Piyush Goyal addressed the World Health Summit (WHS) Regional Meeting Asia 2025, held at Bharat Mandapam, New Delhi today. Shri Goyal highlighted India’s proactive and compassionate global response during the COVID-19 pandemic. Through the Vaccine Maitri initiative, India provided nearly 300 million vaccine doses to less developed and vulnerable countries — many free of cost — ensuring no nation was left behind. Shri Goyal emphasized that unlike many other nations that imposed export controls during COVID-19, India prioritized equitable access for all, staying true to its ancient ethos of Vasudhaiva Kutumbakam — “the world is one family.”

    Speaking on the occasion, Shri Goyal expressed gratitude that the first WHS Regional Meeting in Asia was focused on “Scaling Access to Ensure Health Equity”. He noted that access to quality healthcare is a critical part of sustainable development and shared India’s journey in achieving greater healthcare access for all.

    The Minister recalled personal interactions with global leaders during the pandemic, noting how India ensured the supply of critical medicines at fair prices, resisting the trend of profit-making from global health crises.

    Addressing the theme of Health Equity, Shri Goyal strongly criticized attempts to extend pharmaceutical patents through minor incremental innovations, which, he said, could deprive millions of access to affordable medicines. He urged the WHS delegates to experience firsthand India’s efforts to deliver quality healthcare even in remote regions.

    Shri Goyal highlighted that more than 620 million people are now eligible for free healthcare under the Ayushman Bharat scheme, the world’s largest government-sponsored health insurance program, emphasizing that India’s commitment was never driven by profit but by compassion.

    Quoting Prime Minister Narendra Modi, Shri Goyal said, “For us, healthcare is not just curing a sick patient. Healthcare is preventive healthcare, it is wellness, it is mental healthcare, and it means bridging society under the umbrella of a better lifestyle and a better future.”

    He elaborated on India’s holistic approach to human welfare, highlighting the Swachh Bharat Mission which ensures dignity and sanitation, especially for women; the Pradhan Mantri Awas Yojana, with over 40 million homes already built and millions more underway; the Jal Jeevan Mission, which has expanded tap water access from 30 million to 160 million rural homes; the Ujjwala Yojana, providing free cooking gas connections to protect women from indoor air pollution; and the distribution of free food grains to 800 million citizens during and beyond the pandemic.

    Shri Goyal asserted that physical health, mental wellness, clean environments, quality education, digital connectivity, and economic empowerment together form the basis of a truly healthy society.

    He closed by reaffirming India’s commitment to the global health agenda and called upon all nations to work together towards a healthier, more equitable future for every citizen of the world.

    ***

    Abhishek Dayal/ Abhijjith Narayanan/ Ishita Biswas

    (Release ID: 2124745) Visitor Counter : 109

    MIL OSI Asia Pacific News

  • MIL-OSI: Provident Financial Holdings Reports Third Quarter of Fiscal Year 2025 Results

    Source: GlobeNewswire (MIL-OSI)

    Net Income of $1.86 million in the March 2025 Quarter, Up 113% from the Sequential Quarter and Up 24% from the Comparable Quarter Last Year

    Net Interest Margin of 3.02% in the March 2025 Quarter, Up 11 Basis Points from the Sequential Quarter and 28 Basis Points from the Comparable Quarter Last Year

    Loans Held for Investment of $1.06 Billion at March 31, 2025, Up 1% from June 30, 2024

    Total Deposits of $901.3 Million at March 31, 2025, Up 2% from June 30, 2024

    Non-Performing Assets to Total Assets Ratio of 0.11% at March 31, 2025, Down from 0.20% at June 30, 2024

    RIVERSIDE, Calif., April 28, 2025 (GLOBE NEWSWIRE) — Provident Financial Holdings, Inc. (“Company”), NASDAQ GS: PROV, the holding company for Provident Savings Bank, F.S.B. (“Bank”), today announced earnings for the third quarter of the fiscal year ending June 30, 2025.

    The Company reported net income of $1.86 million, or $0.28 per diluted share (on 6.73 million average diluted shares outstanding), for the quarter ended March 31, 2025, up 24 percent from net income of $1.50 million, or $0.22 per diluted share (on 6.94 million average diluted shares outstanding), in the comparable period a year ago. The increase was due primarily to a $653,000 increase in net interest income and a $391,000 recovery of credit losses (in contrast to a $124,000 provision for credit losses in the comparable period a year ago), partly offset by a $688,000 increase in non-interest expense (primarily attributable to higher salaries and employee benefits and other operating expenses).

    “The operating environment for Provident has improved over the course of this fiscal year. Our net interest margin has improved each quarter subsequent to June 30, 2024, loan and deposit balances have grown for two consecutive quarters, borrowings have declined for two consecutive quarters, and credit quality remains strong,” stated Donavon P. Ternes, President and Chief Executive Officer of the Company. “We remain active in our stock repurchase plan and continue to maintain our quarterly cash dividend at a consistent level,” concluded Ternes.

    Return on average assets was 0.59 percent for the third quarter of fiscal 2025, compared to 0.28 percent in the second quarter of fiscal 2025 and 0.47 percent for the third quarter of fiscal 2024. Return on average stockholders’ equity for the third quarter of fiscal 2025 was 5.71 percent, compared to 2.66 percent for the second quarter of fiscal 2025 and 4.57 percent for the third quarter of fiscal 2024.

    On a sequential quarter basis, the $1.86 million net income for the third quarter of fiscal 2025 reflects a 113 percent increase from $872,000 in the second quarter of fiscal 2025. The increase was primarily attributable to a $391,000 recovery of credit losses (in contrast to a $586,000 provision for credit losses in the prior sequential quarter), and a $453,000 increase in net interest income (primarily due to a higher net interest margin). Diluted earnings per share for the third quarter of fiscal 2025 were $0.28 per share, up 115 percent from $0.13 per share in the second quarter of fiscal 2025.

    For the nine months ended March 31, 2025, net income decreased $769,000, or 14 percent, to $4.63 million from $5.40 million in the comparable period in fiscal 2024. Diluted earnings per share for the nine months ended March 31, 2025 decreased 12 percent to $0.68 per share (on 6.80 million average diluted shares outstanding) from $0.77 per share (on 6.98 million average diluted shares outstanding) for the comparable nine-month period last year. The decrease was primarily attributable to a $1.81 million increase in non-interest expense (primarily due to an increase in salaries and employee benefits, premises and occupancy, equipment and other operating expenses), partly offset by a $451,000 higher recovery of credit losses, a $177,000 increase in non-interest income and a $115,000 increase in net interest income.

    In the third quarter of fiscal 2025, net interest income increased $653,000 or eight percent to $9.21 million from $8.56 million for the same quarter last year. The increase in net interest income was due to a higher net interest margin, partly offset by a lower average balance of interest-earning assets. The net interest margin for the third quarter of fiscal 2025 increased 28 basis points to 3.02 percent from 2.74 percent in the same quarter last year. The increase in net interest margin was due to increased yields on interest-earning assets outpacing increased funding costs. The average yield on interest-earning assets increased 32 basis points to 4.73 percent in the third quarter of fiscal 2025 from 4.41 percent in the same quarter last year. In contrast, our average funding costs increased by five basis points to 1.91 percent in the third quarter of fiscal 2025 from 1.86 percent in the same quarter last year. The average balance of interest-earning assets decreased two percent to $1.22 billion in the third quarter of fiscal 2025 from $1.25 billion in the same quarter last year, primarily due to decreases in the average balance of investment securities and loans receivable, partly offset by an increase in interest-earning deposits.

    Interest income on loans receivable increased $685,000, or five percent, to $13.37 million in the third quarter of fiscal 2025 from $12.68 million in the same quarter of fiscal 2024. The increase was due to a higher average loan yield, partly offset by a lower average loan balance. The average yield on loans receivable increased 32 basis points to 5.06 percent in the third quarter of fiscal 2025 from 4.74 percent in the same quarter last year. Adjustable-rate loans of approximately $130.9 million repriced downward in the third quarter of fiscal 2025 by approximately four basis points, from a weighted average rate of 7.56 percent to 7.52 percent. However, the overall increase in average yield was driven by an upward repricing of adjustable mortgage loans during the last 12 months. The average balance of loans receivable decreased $14.6 million, or one percent, to $1.06 billion in the third quarter of fiscal 2025 from $1.07 billion in the same quarter last year. Total loans originated for investment in the third quarter of fiscal 2025 were $27.9 million, up 53 percent from $18.2 million in the same quarter last year, while loan principal payments received in the third quarter of fiscal 2025 were $23.0 million, down 19 percent from $28.5 million in the same quarter last year.

    Interest income from investment securities decreased $58,000, or 11 percent, to $459,000 in the third quarter of fiscal 2025 from $517,000 for the same quarter of fiscal 2024. This decrease was attributable to a lower average balance, partly offset by a higher average yield. The average balance of investment securities decreased $23.0 million, or 16 percent, to $118.4 million in the third quarter of fiscal 2025 from $141.4 million in the same quarter last year. The decrease in the average balance was due to scheduled principal payments and prepayments of investment securities. The average yield on investment securities increased nine basis points to 1.55 percent in the third quarter of fiscal 2025 from 1.46 percent for the same quarter last year. The increase in the average yield was primarily attributable to a lower premium amortization during the current quarter in comparison to the same quarter last year ($86,000 vs. $124,000) due to lower total principal repayments ($5.3 million vs. $5.7 million) and, to a lesser extent, the upward repricing of adjustable-rate mortgage-backed securities.

    In the third quarter of fiscal 2025, the Bank received $213,000 in cash dividends from the Federal Home Loan Bank (“FHLB”) – San Francisco stock and other equity investments, up one percent from $210,000 in the same quarter last year, resulting in an average yield of 8.30 percent in the third quarter of fiscal 2025 compared to 8.84 percent in the same quarter last year. The average balance of FHLB – San Francisco stock and other equity investments in the third quarter of fiscal 2025 was $10.3 million, up from $9.5 million in the same quarter of fiscal 2024.

    Interest income from interest-earning deposits, primarily cash deposited at the Federal Reserve Bank (“FRB”) of San Francisco, was $389,000 in the third quarter of fiscal 2025, down $8,000 or two percent from $397,000 in the same quarter of fiscal 2024. The decrease was due to a lower average yield, partly offset by a higher average balance. The average yield earned on interest-earning deposits in the third quarter of fiscal 2025 was 4.42 percent, down 98 basis points from 5.40 percent in the same quarter last year. The decrease in the average yield was due to a lower average interest rate on the FRB’s reserve balances resulting from decreases in the targeted federal funds rate during the comparable periods. The average balance of the Company’s interest-earning deposits increased $6.1 million, or 21 percent, to $35.2 million in the third quarter of fiscal 2025 from $29.1 million in the same quarter last year.

    Interest expense on deposits for the third quarter of fiscal 2025 was $2.75 million, an increase of $71,000 or three percent from $2.68 million for the same period last year. The increase was attributable to higher rates paid on deposits, partly offset by a lower average balance. The average cost of deposits was 1.26 percent in the third quarter of fiscal 2025, up eight basis points from 1.18 percent in the same quarter last year, primarily due to a greater proportion of time deposits, including brokered certificates of deposit which carry higher interest rates. The average balance of deposits decreased $25.8 million, or three percent, to $885.0 million in the third quarter of fiscal 2025 from $910.8 million in the same quarter last year.

    Transaction account balances, or “core deposits,” decreased $23.1 million, or four percent, to $591.4 million at March 31, 2025 from $614.5 million at June 30, 2024, while time deposits increased $36.0 million, or 13 percent, to $309.9 million at March 31, 2025 from $273.9 million at June 30, 2024. As of March 31, 2025, brokered certificates of deposit (which amounts are reflected in time deposits above) totaled $129.8 million, down $2.0 million or two percent from $131.8 million at June 30, 2024. The weighted average cost of brokered certificates of deposit was 4.34 percent and 5.18 percent (including broker fees) at March 31, 2025 and June 30, 2024, respectively.

    Interest expense on borrowings, consisting of FHLB advances, for the third quarter of fiscal 2025 decreased $102,000, or four percent, to $2.47 million from $2.57 million for the same period last year. The decrease was primarily the result of a lower average cost and, to a lesser extent, a lower average balance. The average cost of borrowings decreased 11 basis points to 4.52 percent in the third quarter of fiscal 2025 from 4.63 percent in the same quarter last year. The average balance of borrowings decreased $1.8 million, or one percent, to $221.8 million in the third quarter of fiscal 2025 from $223.6 million in the same quarter last year.

    At March 31, 2025, the Bank had approximately $269.8 million of remaining borrowing capacity at the FHLB. Additionally, the Bank has a remaining borrowing facility of approximately $151.0 million with the FRB of San Francisco and an unused unsecured federal funds borrowing facility of $50.0 million with its correspondent bank. The total available borrowing capacity across all sources totaled approximately $470.8 million at March 31, 2025.

    During the third quarter of fiscal 2025, the Company recorded a recovery of credit losses totaling $391,000, which included a $12,000 recovery related to unfunded loan commitment reserves. This compares to a $124,000 provision for credit losses in the same quarter last year and a $586,000 provision in the second quarter of fiscal 2025 (sequential quarter). The recovery of credit losses recorded in the third quarter of fiscal 2025 was primarily attributable to improved qualitative factors related to single-family residential collateral, partly offset by a lengthening of the average loan life due to lower estimated loan prepayments as of March 31, 2025, compared to December 31, 2024.

    Non-performing assets, comprised solely of non-accrual loans secured by properties located in California, decreased $1.2 million or 46 percent to $1.4 million, which represented 0.11 percent of total assets at March 31, 2025, compared to $2.6 million, which represented 0.20 percent of total assets at June 30, 2024. At March 31, 2025, non-performing loans were comprised of seven single-family loans and one multi-family loan, while at June 30, 2024, non-performing loans were comprised of 10 single-family loans. At both dates, the Bank had no real estate owned and no loans 90 days or more past due that were still accruing interest. Additionally, there were no loan charge-offs during the quarters ended March 31, 2025 and 2024.

    The January 2025 wildfires in Los Angeles, California did not have a material impact on the Company’s operations or the Bank’s customers. The Bank’s branches and facilities remained operational throughout the wildfire events, and there were no significant disruptions to customer services or business activities. Additionally, the Bank did not have any significant credit exposure or financial impact attributable to the wildfires.

    Classified assets were $6.8 million at March 31, 2025, consisting of $1.7 million of loans in the special mention category and $5.1 million of loans in the substandard category. Classified assets at June 30, 2024 were $5.8 million, consisting of $1.1 million of loans in the special mention category and $4.7 million of loans in the substandard category.

    The allowance for credit losses on loans held for investment was $6.6 million, or 0.62 percent of gross loans held for investment, at March 31, 2025, down from $7.1 million, or 0.67 percent of gross loans held for investment, at June 30, 2024. The decrease in the allowance for credit losses was due primarily to improved qualitative factors related to single-family residential collateral, partially offset by an increase in the estimated average life of the loan portfolio, reflecting lower loan prepayment expectations as of March 31, 2025. Management believes, based on currently available information, the allowance for credit losses is sufficient to absorb expected losses inherent in loans held for investment at March 31, 2025.

    Non-interest income increased by $59,000, or seven percent, to $907,000 in the third quarter of fiscal 2025 from $848,000 in the same period last year, due primarily to a $43,000 increase in loan servicing and other fees and a $55,000 increase in other fees (primarily attributable to an increase in the unrealized gain on other equity investments). These increases were partly offset by decreases of $26,000 and $13,000 in card and processing fees and deposit account fees, respectively, primarily due to lower transaction volumes and reduced customer activity. On a sequential quarter basis, non-interest income increased $63,000, or seven percent, primarily due to an increase in loan servicing and other fees.

    Non-interest expense increased $688,000, or 10 percent, to $7.86 million in the third quarter of fiscal 2025 from $7.17 million for the same quarter last year, primarily due to a $236,000 increase in salaries and employee benefits expenses and a $235,000 increase in other operating expenses. The higher salaries and employee benefits expenses was primarily due to higher compensation expenses, a higher accrual adjustment for the supplemental executive retirement plan expense, higher group insurance expenses and higher equity incentive expenses, partly offset by a decrease in retirement plan benefit expenses. The increase in other operating expenses was primarily attributable to a $239,000 litigation settlement expense. On a sequential quarter basis, non-interest expense increased $62,000, or one percent as compared to $7.79 million in the second quarter of fiscal 2025, due primarily to the litigation settlement expense, partly offset by decreases in salaries and employee benefits expenses, premises and occupancy expenses and professional expenses.

    The Company’s efficiency ratio, defined as non-interest expense divided by the sum of net interest income and non-interest income, in the third quarter of fiscal 2025 was 77.64 percent, a slight increase from 76.20 percent in the same quarter last year but an improvement from 81.15 percent in the second quarter of fiscal 2025 (sequential quarter). The increase in the efficiency ratio during the current quarter in comparison to the comparable quarter last year was due to higher non-interest expense relative to total net interest income plus non-interest income.

    The Company’s provision for income taxes was $797,000 for the third quarter of fiscal 2025, up 29 percent from $620,000 in the same quarter last year and up 126 percent from $352,000 for the second quarter of fiscal 2025 (sequential quarter). The increase during the current quarter compared to both the sequential quarter and same quarter last year was due to an increase in pre-tax income. The effective tax rate in the third quarter of fiscal 2025 was 30.0 percent as compared to 29.3 percent in the same quarter last year and 28.8 percent for the second quarter of fiscal 2025 (sequential quarter).

    The Company repurchased 51,869 shares of its common stock at an average cost of $15.30 per share during the quarter ended March 31, 2025. As of March 31, 2025, a total of 293,132 shares remained available for future purchase under the Company’s current repurchase program.

    The Bank currently operates 13 retail/business banking offices in Riverside County and San Bernardino County (Inland Empire).

    The Company will host a conference call for institutional investors and bank analysts on Tuesday, April 29, 2025 at 9:00 a.m. (Pacific) to discuss its financial results. The conference call can be accessed by dialing 1-800-715-9871 and referencing Conference ID number 7361828. An audio replay of the conference call will be available through Tuesday, May 6, 2025 by dialing 1-800-770-2030 and referencing Conference ID number 7361828.

    For more financial information about the Company please visit the website at www.myprovident.com and click on the “Investor Relations” section.

    Safe-Harbor Statement

    This press release contains statements that the Company believes are “forward-looking statements” within the meaning of the Private Securities Litigation Reform Act of 1995. These statements relate to the Company’s financial condition, liquidity, results of operations, plans, objectives, future performance or business. You should not place undue reliance on these statements as they are subject to various risks and uncertainties. When considering these forward-looking statements, you should keep in mind these risks and uncertainties, as well as any cautionary statements the Company may make. Moreover, you should treat these statements as speaking only as of the date they are made and based only on information then actually known to the Company.

    There are a number of important factors that could cause future results to differ materially from historical performance and these forward-looking statements. Factors which could cause actual results to differ materially from the results anticipated or implied by our forward-looking statements include, but are not limited to: adverse economic conditions in our local market areas or other markets where we have lending relationships; effects of employment levels, labor shortages, inflation, a recession or slowed economic growth; changes in the interest rate environment, including the increases and decreases in the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve Board (the “Federal Reserve”) benchmark rate and the duration of such levels, which could adversely affect our revenues and expenses, the value of assets and obligations, and the availability and cost of capital and liquidity; the impact of inflation and the Federal Reserve monetary policy; the effects of any Federal government shutdown; credit risks of lending activities, including loan delinquencies, write-offs, changes in our allowance for credit losses (“ACL”), and provision for credit losses; increased competitive pressures, including repricing and competitors’ pricing initiatives, and their impact on our market position, loan, and deposit products; quality and composition of our securities portfolio and the impact of adverse changes in the securities markets; fluctuations in deposits; secondary market conditions for loans and our ability to sell loans in the secondary market; liquidity issues, including our ability to borrow funds or raise additional capital, if necessary; expectations regarding key growth initiatives and strategic priorities; the impact of bank failures or adverse developments at other banks and related negative press about the banking industry in general on investor and depositor sentiment; results of examinations of us by regulatory authorities, which may the possibility that any such regulatory authority may, among other things, institute a formal or informal enforcement action against us or our bank subsidiary which could require us to increase our ACL, write-down assets, change our regulatory capital position or affect our ability to borrow funds or maintain or increase deposits or impose additional requirements or restrictions on us, any of which could adversely affect our liquidity and earnings; legislative and regulatory changes, including changes in banking, securities and tax law, in regulatory policies and principles, or the interpretation of regulatory capital or other rules; use of estimates in determining the fair value of assets, which may prove incorrect; disruptions or security breaches, or other adverse events, failures or interruptions in or attacks on our information technology systems or on our third-party vendors; the potential for new or increased tariffs, trade restrictions or geopolitical tensions that could affect economic activity or specific industry sectors; staffing fluctuations in response to product demand or corporate implementation strategies; our ability to pay dividends on our common stock; environmental, social and governance goals; effects of climate change, severe weather events, natural disasters, pandemics, epidemics and other public health crises, acts of war or terrorism, civil unrest and other external events; and other factors described in the Company’s latest Annual Report on Form 10-K and Quarterly Reports on Form 10-Q and other reports filed with and furnished to the Securities and Exchange Commission (“SEC”), which are available on our website at www.myprovident.com and on the SEC’s website at www.sec.gov.

    We do not undertake and specifically disclaim any obligation to revise any forward-looking statements to reflect the occurrence of anticipated or unanticipated events or circumstances after the date of such statements whether as a result of new information, future events or otherwise. These risks could cause our actual results for fiscal 2025 and beyond to differ materially from those expressed in any forward-looking statements by, or on behalf of us and could negatively affect our operating and stock price performance.

             

    Contacts:

      Donavon P. Ternes   Haryanto L. Sunarto
        President and   Interim Chief Financial Officer
        Chief Executive Officer   (951) 686-6060
    PROVIDENT FINANCIAL HOLDINGS, INC.
    Condensed Consolidated Statements of Financial Condition
    (Unaudited –In Thousands, Except Share and Per Share Information)
                                   
        March 31,   December 31,   September 30,   June 30,   March 31,
        2025
      2024
      2024
      2024
      2024
    Assets                              
    Cash and cash equivalents   $ 50,915     $ 45,539     $ 48,193     $ 51,376     $ 51,731  
    Investment securities – held to maturity, at cost with no allowance for credit losses     113,617       118,888       124,268       130,051       135,971  
    Investment securities – available for sale, at fair value     1,681       1,750       1,809       1,849       1,935  
    Loans held for investment, net of allowance for credit losses of $6,577, $6,956, $6,329, $7,065 and $7,108, respectively; includes $1,032, $1,016, $1,082, $1,047 and $1,054 of loans held at fair value, respectively     1,058,980       1,053,603       1,048,633       1,052,979       1,065,761  
    Accrued interest receivable     4,263       4,167       4,287       4,287       4,249  
    FHLB – San Francisco stock and other equity investments, includes $721, $650, $565, $540 and $0 of other equity investments at fair value, respectively     10,289       10,218       10,133       10,108       9,505  
    Premises and equipment, net     9,388       9,474       9,615       9,313       9,637  
    Prepaid expenses and other assets     11,047       11,327       10,442       12,237       11,258  
    Total assets   $ 1,260,180     $ 1,254,966     $ 1,257,380     $ 1,272,200     $ 1,290,047  
                                   
    Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity                              
    Liabilities:                              
    Noninterest-bearing deposits   $ 89,103     $ 85,399     $ 86,458     $ 95,627     $ 91,708  
    Interest-bearing deposits     812,216       782,116       777,406       792,721       816,414  
    Total deposits     901,319       867,515       863,864       888,348       908,122  
                                   
    Borrowings     215,580       245,500       249,500       238,500       235,000  
    Accounts payable, accrued interest and other liabilities     14,406       13,321       14,410       15,411       17,419  
    Total liabilities     1,131,305       1,126,336       1,127,774       1,142,259       1,160,541  
                                   
    Stockholders’ equity:                              
    Preferred stock, $.01 par value (2,000,000 shares authorized; none issued and outstanding)                              
    Common stock, $.01 par value; (40,000,000 shares authorized; 18,229,615, 18,229,615, 18,229,615, 18,229,615 and 18,229,615 shares issued respectively; 6,653,822, 6,705,691, 6,769,247, 6,847,821 and 6,896,297 shares outstanding, respectively)     183       183       183       183       183  
    Additional paid-in capital     99,096       98,747       98,711       98,532       99,591  
    Retained earnings     211,701       210,779       210,853       209,914       208,923  
    Treasury stock at cost (11,573,793, 11,523,924, 11,460,368, 11,381,794, and 11,333,318 shares, respectively)     (182,121 )     (181,094 )     (180,155 )     (178,685 )     (179,183 )
    Accumulated other comprehensive income (loss), net of tax     16       15       14       (3 )     (8 )
    Total stockholders’ equity     128,875       128,630       129,606       129,941       129,506  
    Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity   $ 1,260,180     $ 1,254,966     $ 1,257,380     $ 1,272,200     $ 1,290,047  
    PROVIDENT FINANCIAL HOLDINGS, INC.
    Condensed Consolidated Statements of Operations
    (Unaudited – In Thousands, Except Per Share Information)
                             
        For the Quarter Ended   Nine Months Ended
           March 31,      March 31,
           2025
         2024      2025
         2024
    Interest income:                        
    Loans receivable, net   $ 13,368     $ 12,683   $ 39,441     $ 37,368  
    Investment securities     459       517     1,412       1,565  
    FHLB – San Francisco stock and other equity investments     213       210     636       586  
    Interest-earning deposits     389       397     1,036       1,295  
    Total interest income     14,429       13,807     42,525       40,814  
                             
    Interest expense:                        
    Checking and money market deposits     46       90     150       219  
    Savings deposits     127       97     356       208  
    Time deposits     2,573       2,488     7,738       6,406  
    Borrowings     2,471       2,573     7,694       7,509  
    Total interest expense     5,217       5,248     15,938       14,342  
                             
    Net interest income     9,212       8,559     26,587       26,472  
    (Recovery of) provision for credit losses     (391 )     124     (502 )     (51 )
    Net interest income, after (recovery of) provision for credit losses     9,603       8,435     27,089       26,523  
                             
    Non-interest income:                        
    Loan servicing and other fees     135       92     299       195  
    Deposit account fees     276       289     856       876  
    Card and processing fees     291       317     911       1,003  
    Other     205       150     585       400  
    Total non-interest income     907       848     2,651       2,474  
                             
    Non-interest expense:                        
    Salaries and employee benefits     4,776       4,540     14,235       13,223  
    Premises and occupancy     880       835     2,748       2,641  
    Equipment     417       329     1,139       962  
    Professional     386       321     1,224       1,203  
    Sales and marketing     181       167     541       516  
    Deposit insurance premiums and regulatory assessments     195       190     568       596  
    Other     1,021       786     2,718       2,227  
    Total non-interest expense     7,856       7,168     23,173       21,368  
    Income before income taxes     2,654       2,115     6,567       7,629  
    Provision for income taxes     797       620     1,938       2,231  
    Net income   $ 1,857     $ 1,495   $ 4,629     $ 5,398  
                             
    Basic earnings per share   $ 0.28     $ 0.22   $ 0.69     $ 0.77  
    Diluted earnings per share   $ 0.28     $ 0.22   $ 0.68     $ 0.77  
    Cash dividends per share   $ 0.14     $ 0.14   $ 0.42     $ 0.42  
    PROVIDENT FINANCIAL HOLDINGS, INC.
    Condensed Consolidated Statements of Operations – Sequential Quarters
    (Unaudited – In Thousands, Except Per Share Information)
                                   
        For the Quarter Ended
        March 31,   December 31,   September 30,   June 30,   March 31,
           2025
         2024      2024
         2024
         2024
    Interest income:                              
    Loans receivable, net   $ 13,368     $ 13,050   $ 13,023     $ 12,826     $ 12,683
    Investment securities     459       471     482       504       517
    FHLB – San Francisco stock and other equity investments     213       213     210       207       210
    Interest-earning deposits     389       287     360       379       397
    Total interest income     14,429       14,021     14,075       13,916       13,807
                                   
    Interest expense:                              
    Checking and money market deposits     46       51     53       71       90
    Savings deposits     127       117     112       105       97
    Time deposits     2,573       2,506     2,659       2,657       2,488
    Borrowings     2,471       2,588     2,635       2,632       2,573
    Total interest expense     5,217       5,262     5,459       5,465       5,248
                                   
    Net interest income     9,212       8,759     8,616       8,451       8,559
    (Recovery of) provision for credit losses     (391 )     586     (697 )     (12 )     124
    Net interest income, after (recovery of) provision for credit losses     9,603       8,173     9,313       8,463       8,435
                                   
    Non-interest income:                              
    Loan servicing and other fees     135       60     104       142       92
    Deposit account fees     276       282     298       278       289
    Card and processing fees     291       300     320       381       317
    Other     205       203     177       666       150
    Total non-interest income     907       845     899       1,467       848
                                   
    Non-interest expense:                              
    Salaries and employee benefits     4,776       4,826     4,633       4,419       4,540
    Premises and occupancy     880       917     951       945       835
    Equipment     417       379     343       347       329
    Professional     386       412     426       327       321
    Sales and marketing     181       187     173       193       167
    Deposit insurance premiums and regulatory assessments     195       190     183       184       190
    Other     1,021       883     814       757       786
    Total non-interest expense     7,856       7,794     7,523       7,172       7,168
    Income before income taxes     2,654       1,224     2,689       2,758       2,115
    Provision for income taxes     797       352     789       805       620
    Net income   $ 1,857     $ 872   $ 1,900     $ 1,953     $ 1,495
                                   
    Basic earnings per share   $ 0.28     $ 0.13   $ 0.28     $ 0.28     $ 0.22
    Diluted earnings per share   $ 0.28     $ 0.13   $ 0.28     $ 0.28     $ 0.22
    Cash dividends per share   $ 0.14     $ 0.14   $ 0.14     $ 0.14     $ 0.14
                                   
    PROVIDENT FINANCIAL HOLDINGS, INC.
    Financial Highlights
    (Unaudited – Dollars in Thousands, Except Share and Per Share Information)
                               
        As of and For the  
        Quarter Ended   Nine Months Ended  
        March 31,   March 31,  
           2025      2024      2025      2024  
    SELECTED FINANCIAL RATIOS:                          
    Return on average assets     0.59 %   0.47 %   0.50 %   0.56 %
    Return on average stockholders’ equity     5.71 %   4.57 %   4.72 %   5.51 %
    Stockholders’ equity to total assets     10.23 %   10.04 %   10.23 %   10.04 %
    Net interest spread     2.82 %   2.55 %   2.74 %   2.64 %
    Net interest margin     3.02 %   2.74 %   2.92 %   2.80 %
    Efficiency ratio     77.64 %   76.20 %   79.26 %   73.82 %
    Average interest-earning assets to average interest-bearing liabilities     110.25 %   110.28 %   110.38 %   110.24 %
                               
    SELECTED FINANCIAL DATA:                          
    Basic earnings per share   $ 0.28   $ 0.22   $ 0.69   $ 0.77  
    Diluted earnings per share   $ 0.28   $ 0.22   $ 0.68   $ 0.77  
    Book value per share   $ 19.37   $ 18.78   $ 19.37   $ 18.78  
    Shares used for basic EPS computation     6,679,808     6,919,397     6,753,060     6,968,353  
    Shares used for diluted EPS computation     6,732,794     6,935,053     6,796,743     6,981,223  
    Total shares issued and outstanding     6,653,822     6,896,297     6,653,822     6,896,297  
                               
    LOANS ORIGINATED FOR INVESTMENT:                          
    Mortgage loans:                          
    Single-family   $ 22,163   $ 8,946   $ 74,195   $ 30,058  
    Multi-family     4,087     5,865     15,772     17,586  
    Commercial real estate     1,135     2,172     2,760     8,047  
    Commercial business loans     500     1,250     550     1,250  
    Total loans originated for investment   $ 27,885   $ 18,233   $ 93,277   $ 56,941  
    PROVIDENT FINANCIAL HOLDINGS, INC.
    Financial Highlights
    (Unaudited – Dollars in Thousands, Except Share and Per Share Information)
                                     
        As of and For the  
        Quarter   Quarter   Quarter   Quarter   Quarter  
        Ended   Ended   Ended   Ended   Ended  
           03/31/25      12/31/24      09/30/24      06/30/24      03/31/24  
    SELECTED FINANCIAL RATIOS:                                
    Return on average assets     0.59 %   0.28 %   0.61 %   0.62 %   0.47 %
    Return on average stockholders’ equity     5.71 %   2.66 %   5.78 %   5.96 %   4.57 %
    Stockholders’ equity to total assets     10.23 %   10.25 %   10.31 %   10.21 %   10.04 %
    Net interest spread     2.82 %   2.74 %   2.66 %   2.54 %   2.55 %
    Net interest margin     3.02 %   2.91 %   2.84 %   2.74 %   2.74 %
    Efficiency ratio     77.64 %   81.15 %   79.06 %   72.31 %   76.20 %
    Average interest-earning assets to average interest-bearing liabilities     110.25 %   110.52 %   110.34 %   110.40 %   110.28 %
                                     
    SELECTED FINANCIAL DATA:                                
    Basic earnings per share   $ 0.28   $ 0.13   $ 0.28   $ 0.28   $ 0.22  
    Diluted earnings per share   $ 0.28   $ 0.13   $ 0.28   $ 0.28   $ 0.22  
    Book value per share   $ 19.37   $ 19.18   $ 19.15   $ 18.98   $ 18.78  
    Average shares used for basic EPS     6,679,808     6,744,653     6,833,125     6,867,521     6,919,397  
    Average shares used for diluted EPS     6,732,794     6,792,759     6,863,083     6,893,813     6,935,053  
    Total shares issued and outstanding     6,653,822     6,705,691     6,769,247     6,847,821     6,896,297  
                                     
    LOANS ORIGINATED FOR INVESTMENT:                                
    Mortgage loans:                                
    Single-family   $ 22,163   $ 29,583   $ 22,449   $ 10,862   $ 8,946  
    Multi-family     4,087     6,495     5,190     4,526     5,865  
    Commercial real estate     1,135     365     1,260     1,710     2,172  
    Construction                 1,480      
    Commercial business loans     500         50         1,250  
    Total loans originated for investment   $ 27,885   $ 36,443   $ 28,949   $ 18,578   $ 18,233  
    PROVIDENT FINANCIAL HOLDINGS, INC.
    Financial Highlights
    (Unaudited – Dollars in Thousands)
                                     
           As of      As of      As of      As of      As of  
        03/31/25   12/31/24   09/30/24   06/30/24   03/31/24  
    ASSET QUALITY RATIOS AND DELINQUENT LOANS:                                
    Recourse reserve for loans sold   $ 23   $ 23   $ 23   $ 26   $ 31  
    Allowance for credit losses on loans held for investment   $ 6,577   $ 6,956   $ 6,329   $ 7,065   $ 7,108  
    Non-performing loans to loans held for investment, net     0.13 %   0.24 %   0.20 %   0.25 %   0.21 %
    Non-performing assets to total assets     0.11 %   0.20 %   0.17 %   0.20 %   0.17 %
    Allowance for credit losses on loans to gross loans held for investment     0.62 %   0.66 %   0.61 %   0.67 %   0.67 %
    Net loan charge-offs (recoveries) to average loans receivable (annualized)     %   %   %   %   %
    Non-performing loans   $ 1,395   $ 2,530   $ 2,106   $ 2,596   $ 2,246  
    Loans 30 to 89 days delinquent   $ 199   $ 3   $ 2   $ 1   $ 388  
                                   
           Quarter      Quarter      Quarter      Quarter      Quarter
        Ended   Ended   Ended   Ended   Ended
        03/31/25   12/31/24   09/30/24   06/30/24   03/31/24
    (Recovery) recourse provision for loans sold   $     $   $ (3 )   $ (5 )   $
    (Recovery of) provision for credit losses   $ (391 )   $ 586   $ (697 )   $ (12 )   $ 124
    Net loan charge-offs (recoveries)   $     $   $     $     $
                           
           As of      As of      As of      As of      As of  
        03/31/2025   12/31/2024   09/30/2024   06/30/2024   03/31/2024  
    REGULATORY CAPITAL RATIOS (BANK):                      
    Tier 1 leverage ratio   9.85 % 9.81 % 9.63 % 10.02 % 9.70 %
    Common equity tier 1 capital ratio   19.01 % 18.60 % 18.36 % 19.29 % 18.77 %
    Tier 1 risk-based capital ratio   19.01 % 18.60 % 18.36 % 19.29 % 18.77 %
    Total risk-based capital ratio   20.03 % 19.67 % 19.35 % 20.38 % 19.85 %
                           
        As of March 31,  
           2025      2024  
           Balance      Rate(1)      Balance      Rate(1)  
    INVESTMENT SECURITIES:                      
    Held to maturity (at cost):                      
    U.S. SBA securities   $ 328   4.85 % $ 458   5.85 %
    U.S. government sponsored enterprise MBS     109,718   1.60     131,711   1.54  
    U.S. government sponsored enterprise CMO     3,571   2.13     3,802   2.16  
    Total investment securities held to maturity   $ 113,617   1.62 % $ 135,971   1.57 %
                           
    Available for sale (at fair value):                      
    U.S. government agency MBS   $ 1,119   4.72 % $ 1,274   3.72 %
    U.S. government sponsored enterprise MBS     482   6.91     570   6.05  
    Private issue CMO     80   6.10     91   4.96  
    Total investment securities available for sale   $ 1,681   5.41 % $ 1,935   4.46 %
    Total investment securities   $ 115,298   1.68 % $ 137,906   1.61 %

    (1) Weighted-average yield earned on all instruments included in the balance of the respective line item.

    PROVIDENT FINANCIAL HOLDINGS, INC.
    Financial Highlights
    (Unaudited – Dollars in Thousands)
                           
        As of March 31,  
           2025      2024  
           Balance      Rate(1)      Balance      Rate(1)  
    LOANS HELD FOR INVESTMENT:                      
    Mortgage loans:                      
    Single-family (1 to 4 units)   $ 545,377     4.66 % $ 517,039     4.39 %
    Multi-family (5 or more units)     429,547     5.47     457,401     5.14  
    Commercial real estate     75,349     6.63     83,136     6.36  
    Construction     837     11.00     2,745     8.81  
    Other     89     5.25     99     5.25  
    Commercial business loans     4,255     9.52     2,835     9.79  
    Consumer loans     52     17.50     60     18.50  
    Total loans held for investment     1,055,506     5.15 %   1,063,315     4.89 %
                           
    Advance payments of escrows     519           371        
    Deferred loan costs, net     9,532           9,183        
    Allowance for credit losses on loans     (6,577 )         (7,108 )      
    Total loans held for investment, net   $ 1,058,980         $ 1,065,761        
    Purchased loans serviced by others included above   $ 1,721     5.72 % $ 1,999     5.80 %

    (1) Weighted-average yield earned on all instruments included in the balance of the respective line item.

                           
        As of March 31,  
           2025      2024  
           Balance      Rate(1)      Balance      Rate(1)  
    DEPOSITS:                      
    Checking accounts – noninterest-bearing   $ 89,103   % $ 91,708   %
    Checking accounts – interest-bearing     248,392   0.04     275,920   0.04  
    Savings accounts     232,308   0.24     247,847   0.17  
    Money market accounts     21,640   0.16     26,715   0.41  
    Time deposits     309,876   3.57     265,932   3.89  
    Total deposits(2)(3)   $ 901,319   1.30 % $ 908,122   1.21 %
                           
    Brokered CDs included in time deposits above   $ 129,770   4.34 % $ 130,900   5.19 %
                           
    BORROWINGS:                      
    Overnight   $ 20,000   4.65 % $   %
    Three months or less     22,500   4.17     59,500   5.28  
    Over three to six months     5,000   5.33     33,000   5.34  
    Over six months to one year     108,000   4.65     70,000   4.51  
    Over one year to two years     45,000   4.66     42,500   4.62  
    Over two years to three years     80   4.50     15,000   4.87  
    Over three years to four years     15,000   4.41        
    Over four years to five years           15,000   4.41  
    Over five years              
    Total borrowings(4)   $ 215,580   4.60 % $ 235,000   4.86 %

    (1) Weighted-average rate paid on all instruments included in the balance of the respective line item.
    (2) Includes uninsured deposits of approximately $162.2 million (of which, $57.1 million are collateralized) and $136.4 million (of which, $9.2 million are collateralized) at March 31, 2025 and 2024, respectively.
    (3) The average balance of deposit accounts was approximately $37 thousand and $34 thousand at March 31, 2025 and 2024, respectively.
    (4) The Bank had approximately $269.8 million and $269.2 million of remaining borrowing capacity at the FHLB – San Francisco, approximately $151.0 million and $172.7 million of borrowing capacity at the FRB of San Francisco and $50.0 million and $50.0 million of borrowing capacity with its correspondent bank at March 31, 2025 and 2024, respectively.

    PROVIDENT FINANCIAL HOLDINGS, INC.
    Financial Highlights
    (Unaudited – Dollars in Thousands)
                             
        For the Quarter Ended   For the Quarter Ended  
        March 31, 2025   March 31, 2024  
           Balance      Rate(1)      Balance      Rate(1)  
    SELECTED AVERAGE BALANCE SHEETS:                        
                             
    Loans receivable, net   $ 1,056,441     5.06 % $ 1,071,004   4.74 %
    Investment securities     118,431     1.55     141,390   1.46  
    FHLB – San Francisco stock and other equity investments     10,268     8.30     9,505   8.84  
    Interest-earning deposits     35,182     4.42     29,099   5.40  
    Total interest-earning assets   $ 1,220,322     4.73 % $ 1,250,998   4.41 %
    Total assets   $ 1,251,168         $ 1,281,975      
                             
    Deposits(2)   $ 885,032     1.26 % $ 910,781   1.18 %
    Borrowings     221,787     4.52     223,632   4.63  
    Total interest-bearing liabilities(2)   $ 1,106,819     1.91 % $ 1,134,413   1.86 %
    Total stockholders’ equity   $ 130,081         $ 130,906      

    (1) Weighted-average yield earned or rate paid on all instruments included in the balance of the respective line item.
    (2) Includes the average balance of noninterest-bearing checking accounts of $88.4 million and $91.0 million during the quarters ended March 31, 2025 and 2024, respectively. The average balance of uninsured deposits of $131.2 million and $139.0 million in the quarters ended March 31, 2025 and 2024, respectively.

                             
        Nine Months Ended   Nine Months Ended  
           March 31, 2025      March 31, 2024  
           Balance      Rate(1)      Balance      Rate(1)  
    SELECTED AVERAGE BALANCE SHEETS:                        
                             
    Loans receivable, net   $ 1,050,748     5.00 % $ 1,072,741   4.64 %
    Investment securities     123,983     1.52     147,445   1.42  
    FHLB – San Francisco stock and other equity investments     10,186     8.33     9,505   8.22  
    Interest-earning deposits     28,404     4.79     31,538   5.38  
    Total interest-earning assets   $ 1,213,321     4.67 % $ 1,261,229   4.31 %
    Total assets   $ 1,243,635         $ 1,291,902      
                             
    Deposits(2)   $ 876,176     1.25 % $ 921,905   0.99 %
    Borrowings     223,087     4.59     222,206   4.50  
    Total interest-bearing liabilities(2)   $ 1,099,263     1.93 % $ 1,144,111   1.67 %
    Total stockholders’ equity   $ 130,911         $ 130,686      

    (1) Weighted-average yield earned or rate paid on all instruments included in the balance of the respective line item.
    (2) Includes the average balance of noninterest-bearing checking accounts of $88.4 million and $98.9 million during the nine months ended March 31, 2025 and 2024, respectively. The average balance of uninsured deposits of $127.5 million and $139.1 million in the nine months ended March 31, 2025 and 2024, respectively.

    ASSET QUALITY:

                                   
           As of      As of      As of      As of      As of
        03/31/25   12/31/24   09/30/24   06/30/24   03/31/24
    Loans on non-accrual status                              
    Mortgage loans:                              
    Single-family   $ 925   $ 2,530   $ 2,106   $ 2,596   $ 2,246
    Multi-family     470                
    Total     1,395     2,530     2,106     2,596     2,246
                                   
    Accruing loans past due 90 days or more:                    
    Total                    
                                   
    Total non-performing loans (1)     1,395     2,530     2,106     2,596     2,246
                                   
    Real estate owned, net                    
    Total non-performing assets   $ 1,395   $ 2,530   $ 2,106   $ 2,596   $ 2,246

    (1) The non-performing loan balances are net of individually evaluated or collectively evaluated allowances, specifically attached to the individual loans.

    The MIL Network

  • MIL-OSI United Kingdom: Buckinghamshire events director sentenced for Covid fraud

    Source: United Kingdom – Government Statements

    Press release

    Buckinghamshire events director sentenced for Covid fraud

    Bounce Back Loan fraudster convicted following Insolvency Service investigations

    • William Blenkarn claimed he did not know he was not entitled to a second Bounce Back Loan for MJB Events Limited 

    • Blenkarn obtained double the amount of Covid support his company was entitled to as a result of his fraudulent declaration  

    • Money from the loan was then transferred to a new company Blenkarn had set up just weeks into the pandemic

    The owner of two Buckinghamshire-based events companies has been handed a suspended sentence after receiving £100,000 in Covid support funds when he was only entitled to half that figure. 

    William Blenkarn secured two Bounce Back Loans worth £50,000 each for his MJB Events Limited company, breaking the rules of the scheme which specifically stated that businesses could only have a single loan. 

    The 48-year-old then transferred £41,000 from the company’s bank account to his second business – MJB Entertainment Group Ltd – which had only been set up weeks before his fraudulent application. 

    Blenkarn, formerly of London End, Beaconsfield, but now living in Spain, was sentenced to two years in prison, suspended for 18 months, at Aylesbury Crown Court on Thursday 24 April. 

    He was also ordered to complete 200 hours of unpaid work. 

    David Snasdell, Chief Investigator at the Insolvency Service, said:

    William Blenkarn’s company received double the amount of public money it deserved due to his false declaration when applying for a second Bounce Back Loan. 

    This was taxpayers’ money and Blenkarn made matters worse by moving a significant proportion of the loan over to his new company which had only been trading for a few months.

    MJB Events was incorporated in January 2016 and was described as an events company. MJB Entertainment Group was set up in early April 2020. 

    Blenkarn told the Insolvency Service that MJB Entertainment Group was created to manage and book artists but developed into organising a range of charity events. 

    The company also described itself as providing additional services such as marquee design and wedding planning. 

    Blenkarn applied to two different banks for £50,000 Bounce Back Loans – the maximum allowed under the scheme – on behalf of MJB Events in May 2020. 

    For his second application, Blenkarn ticked the online declaration to certify that this was the only application made on behalf of the business. 

    Despite this, Blenkarn claimed he did not know that he could only apply for one loan for each company. 

    Two payments of £25,000 and £16,000 were then made to MJB Entertainment Group from the bank account belonging to MJB Events in July 2020. 

    These transactions left the MJB Events account overdrawn by around £25,000 at the time liquidators were appointed in June 2021, depriving creditors of the funds. 

    Blenkarn also breached his duties as a director by failing to deliver accounting records for MJB Events to the liquidator as he was required to do by law. 

    The Insolvency Service is seeking to recover the fraudulently obtained funds under the Proceeds of Crime Act 2002.

    Further information

    Updates to this page

    Published 28 April 2025

    MIL OSI United Kingdom

  • MIL-Evening Report: Pokies line the coffers of governments and venues – but there are ways to tame this gambling gorilla

    Source: The Conversation (Au and NZ) – By Charles Livingstone, Associate Professor, School of Public Health and Preventive Medicine, Monash University

    Recently, much public attention has been given to the way online wagering and its incessant promotion has infiltrated sport and our TV screens.

    Despite a 2023 parliamentary inquiry that recommended new restrictions on online (especially sport) gambling advertising, the federal government neglected to implement any of the 31 recommendations.




    Read more:
    Will the government’s online gambling advertising legislation ever eventuate? Don’t bet on it


    This seems to have resulted from a furious and well resourced campaign by gambling’s ecosystem: wagering companies, broadcasters, sporting leagues, and others who currently drink from the fountain of gambling revenue.

    Naturally, this issue garnered a great deal of attention, as it should.

    But there’s another even bigger gambling gorilla that has steadily rebuilt its profits post-pandemic. You’ll probably find some at a hotel or social club near you.

    This is, of course, pokies: Australia’s version of slot machines.

    Australia’s major source of gambling problems

    Australians lost A$15.8 billion on pokies in 2022–23, over half of that ($8.1 billion) in New South Wales. That’s an increase of 7.6% from 2018–19 (before pandemic restrictions closed many venues or restricted operations).

    Wagering (sports and race betting) losses grew a hefty 45% over the same period, to around $8.4 billion. Even so, it remains way behind the pokies as Australia’s biggest source of gambling losses and problems.

    Casino losses dropped by 35.5%. Casinos are also poke venues, but also offer other forms of gambling. Pokies in casinos are counted as “casino” gambling in national gambling statistics, while pokies in clubs and pubs continue to be counted separately.

    A recent study found pokies responsible for between 52% and 57% of gambling problems in Australia. Wagering was estimated at 20%.

    Recent growth may have altered these a little but pokies are still responsible for half of Australia’s gambling losses.

    The gambling industry is fond of pointing out only a modest proportion of the population have serious gambling problems. That’s true, according to most prevalence studies.

    But what also has to be remembered is, most people never use pokies. In 2024, the latest population study for NSW found only 14.3% of adults used pokies at all.

    But around 18.5% of pokie users are either high or moderate risk gamblers: 35% of gamblers who use pokies at least once a month are classified as either high or moderate risk gamblers.

    And in 2010 the Productivity Commission estimated 41% of the money lost on pokies came from the most seriously addicted, with another 20% coming from those with more moderate issues. Overall, well over half of the losses.

    It’s little wonder pokie operators resist reforms.

    Why are pokies so profitable?

    The first and obvious answer to this is that there are a lot of them: they are widely accessible across Australia (apart from Western Australia, where they’re only in a single casino).

    NSW alone has about 87,500. Queensland has about half that number, and Victoria about 26,000.

    All of these are located in pubs or clubs, and in NSW they collect (on average) $93,000 per machine per year.

    Second, they’re overwhelmingly concentrated in areas where people are doing it tough. Stress and strain are common where there are pokies.

    Some people start to use them thinking they might alleviate financial woes. They don’t, of course. But they do provide an escape from the vicissitudes of daily life.

    Once sampled, that can become addictive.

    People who use pokies a lot call this escape from reality “the zone” – once you’re there, nothing matters, except staying there.

    The zone is also known as “immersion”, or “loss of executive control”: people using pokies find it very difficult, if not impossible, to stop. Once the money’s gone, reality crashes in.

    Pokies are also extremely addictive. Along with online casino games (which includes virtual pokies or slot machines), they are generally regarded as the most addictive and harmful gambling products.

    They have a host of features engineered into them, including “losses disguised as wins”, “near misses” and many others.

    They are engineered with 10 million or more possible outcomes and it is not possible for anyone to predict what outcome will come next.

    Crucially, the house always wins. In a machine where the “return to player ratio” is set at 87% (a common, completely lawful setting), the machine would retain 13% of all wagers.

    Unfortunately, few pokie users understand these characteristics.

    Can’t we rein in the pokies?

    So why do politicians resist reform?

    One reason for this is the pokie revenue that flows into government coffers.

    In 2022–23, state governments received a total of more than $9 billion in gambling taxes – 7.8% of all state tax revenue. Of this, $5.3 billion came from pokies. NSW alone got $2.23 billion from pokies, Victoria $1.3 billion, and Queensland $1.1 billion.

    The venues, of course, receive a great deal more. One of the consequences of all that money flowing into the coffers of pubs and clubs is political access and influence.

    We can, however, tame the pokies if we want to.

    Various solutions are available, including pre-commitment, generally believed to be the most likely candidate.

    This involves pokie users being required to set a limit prior to using the machines, which is now common in many countries in Europe, and has been proposed (but delayed or scuttled) in Australia for Tasmania, Victoria, and New South Wales.

    More broadly however, this has been strongly resisted by the gambling ecosystem, including parties such as ClubsNSW and the Tasmanian Hospitality Association. Their influence appears profound.

    Change is needed, urgently

    Australia’s reputation as the world’s biggest gambling losers is unenviable: we lose $32 billion on gambling products every year.

    Clearly, prohibition of gambling ads, and the termination of sports sponsorships that tie football, cricket and other major sports to gambling is needed urgently.

    But if we really want to reduce gambling problems and their extraordinary catalogue of harm, reining in the pokies is a must.

    That may take some serious effort.

    Charles Livingstone has received funding from the Victorian Responsible Gambling Foundation, the (former) Victorian Gambling Research Panel, and the South Australian Independent Gambling Authority (the funds for which were derived from hypothecation of gambling tax revenue to research purposes), from the Australian and New Zealand School of Government and the Foundation for Alcohol Research and Education, and from non-government organisations for research into multiple aspects of poker machine gambling, including regulatory reform, existing harm minimisation practices, and technical characteristics of gambling forms. He has received travel and co-operation grants from the Alberta Problem Gambling Research Institute, the Finnish Institute for Public Health, the Finnish Alcohol Research Foundation, the Ontario Problem Gambling Research Committee, the Turkish Red Crescent Society, and the Problem Gambling Foundation of New Zealand. He was a Chief Investigator on an Australian Research Council funded project researching mechanisms of influence on government by the tobacco, alcohol and gambling industries. He has undertaken consultancy research for local governments and non-government organisations in Australia and the UK seeking to restrict or reduce the concentration of poker machines and gambling impacts, and was a member of the Australian government’s Ministerial Expert Advisory Group on Gambling in 2010-11. He is a member of the Lancet Public Health Commission into gambling, and of the World Health Organisation expert group on gambling and gambling harm. He made a submission to and appeared before the HoR Standing Committee on Social Policy and Legal Affairs inquiry into online gambling and its impacts on those experiencing gambling harm.

    ref. Pokies line the coffers of governments and venues – but there are ways to tame this gambling gorilla – https://theconversation.com/pokies-line-the-coffers-of-governments-and-venues-but-there-are-ways-to-tame-this-gambling-gorilla-252038

    MIL OSI AnalysisEveningReport.nz

  • MIL-OSI United Kingdom: Major NHS App expansion cuts waiting times

    Source: United Kingdom – Executive Government & Departments 2

    Press release

    Major NHS App expansion cuts waiting times

    Reform of NHS App stops 1.5 million hospital appointments being missed, with 87% of hospitals now offering services through NHS App.

    • Reform of NHS App stops 1.5 million hospital appointments being missed, saving 5.7 million staff hours since July  
    • Push to get patients seen quicker is part of Government’s Plan for Change to end hospital backlogs and shift NHS services from analogue to digital 
    • 87% of hospitals now offering services through NHS App – up nearly 20% since July and exceeding government target 

    Millions of patients are benefiting from greater choice and flexibility in the way they access healthcare as the Prime Minister welcomes a major milestone in the roll out of the NHS App today.

    Latest data shows 1.5 million appointments have been saved thanks to the Government’s accelerated rollout of the NHS App, which helps patients access treatment more conveniently so that it fits around their lives, rather than the other way round.

    Making sure patients get greater power over how and when they can book their treatments and appointments is at the heart of the government’s plans to end hospital backlogs and improve care through the Plan for Change.   

    Users can manage appointments, view prescriptions, access their GP health record, and receive notifications at the touch of a button, reducing stress on healthcare services and providing easier access to information and services.   

    The government has exceeded its first target under the plan to increase the number of hospitals allowing patients to view appointment information via the App up to 85% by the end of March – reaching 87%, up from 68% in July 2024. 

    Prime Minister Keir Starmer said:

    Our NHS has been stuck in the dark ages – held back by old fashioned systems where patients are struggling for appointments and unable to access their own data.

    We saw during the pandemic how apps can totally transform everyday access to health services. So there’s no excuse for the lack of progress in the NHS we’ve inherited.

    NHS reform has to come through better use of tech – it’s the fuel we need to power change.

    As we deliver our Plan for Change to end hospital backlogs, I want to see more and more people having the option to use the app, so that everyone benefits from more control and choice over their treatment.

    Measures to expand the use of the App were set out earlier this year in the government’s Elective Reform Plan, which set out how patients will be offered a wider choice of providers and an easier, quicker way to book appointments.  

    The move comes as the government steps up the use of health data to accelerate the discovery of life-saving drugs and improve patient care. Earlier this month, the Prime Minister announced an investment alongside Wellcome Trust of up to £600 million to create a new health data research service. This will transform access to NHS data by providing a secure single access point to national-scale data sets, slashing red tape for researchers and boosting the UK’s world leading life sciences sector.

    Health Secretary Wes Streeting said:      

    This government is determined to get our NHS fixed and fit for the future – and this is just one of the innovative ways through the Plan for Change that we’re helping patients, cutting waiting lists and saving taxpayers money all at the same time.  

    By putting the latest technology into the hands of patients so they can access services quicker, we’re freeing up more time for doctors and nurses to focus on treating people and getting waiting lists down.

    This government is doing things differently. Every missed appointment and wasted staff hour saved means another patient getting the care they need as we drive a digital NHS revolution through our Plan for Change.”  

    Since July, the increased use of existing app features have saved almost 5.7 million hours of staff time including 1.26 million clinical hours across care settings – together with the 1.5 million missed appointments avoided, the NHS App has helped save the equivalent of £622 million.

    The app has spared staff from tasks such as managing appointments, completing questionnaires, ordering repeat prescriptions and taking patient details, freeing up frontline staff to focus directly on patient care and treatment.

    And new analysis shows patients are getting faster treatment, with trusts that offer services through the app and patient online systems cutting waiting times for more elective care patients than those who do not.  

    Trusts who use the app’s key features saw a 3-percentage point increase in the number waiting less than 18 weeks in November 2024. This would equate to up to 211,000 more treatments meeting the 18 week target over the same time period if expanded to all hospitals across the country. 

    With more patients able to access correspondence digitally through the App, almost 12 million fewer paper letters have been sent by hospitals since July – saving £5.2million in postage costs. Forecasts for this year show the use of in-app notifications for planned care will prevent the need for 15.7million SMS messages – saving the NHS a further £985,000.     

    To assist elderly and more vulnerable patients, the NHS is now offering the public support in how to access online health services including the NHS App at 1,400 libraries across England. 

    Dr Vin Diwakar, NHS national clinical transformation director, said:

    The NHS App is leading the way in switching from analogue to digital services, empowering over 37 million users with faster access to information and slashing waiting times.

    With services now live in 87% of hospitals it is also boosting NHS productivity, cutting the number of missed appointments and freeing up almost 5.7 million staff hours since July alone.

    Saffron Cordery, interim chief executive of NHS Providers, said:

    Any innovations that give patients more control over their care, reduce the risk of missed appointments and free up valuable staff time so that they can focus on patients are a step in the right direction.

    While it’s really positive that even more hospitals are now offering services through the NHS App, trust leaders know that not everyone has access to or feels comfortable using technology. That’s why it’s welcome that alongside paper letters and phone calls, the NHS is offering more support to help elderly and more vulnerable patients access online health services including via the NHS App.

    Planned NHS App upgrades are set to include the ability for patients to choose from a wide range of providers through the app; book tests at convenient locations, such as their local community diagnostic centre; and receive test results quickly through the app before choosing the next step. 

    The app drive is part of the government’s wider ambitions to shift NHS services from analogue to digital and cut waiting lists under its Plan for Change. With a total of three million additional appointments already delivered six months early, the government is exceeding its own targets and driving down waiting lists at pace, which have fallen for six months in a row and by 219,000 since July.   

    The milestone follows the government’s announcement that 4.5 million tests, checks and scans were carried out in Community Diagnostic Centres (CDCs) between July and February, a 50% increase on the previous year. Alongside this, NHS waiting lists in the areas with the highest economic inactivity have been slashed by almost 50,000 between October and February – a number larger than Stamford Bridge stadium.

    Dr John Dean, Clinical Vice President of the Royal College of Physicians, said:

    We welcome the continued rollout and improvements to the NHS app with the aim of putting patients in control of their own health. A focus on incrementally building functionality in the NHS App to support patients to manage their own healthcare will lead to better more connected digital systems that work better for staff and patients, freeing up time and increasing productivity.

    We are keen to work closely with NHS England and the government to ensure that the NHS App is rolled out and improved in ways that most benefit patients and clinicians. It is also vital that we ensure sufficient mitigations are put in place so that those without access to the app are not excluded from accessing the same quality of patient care.

    Rachel Power, Chief Executive of the Patients Association, said:

    It’s very encouraging to see how digital tools like the NHS App are giving patients greater power over their healthcare, from managing appointments to accessing important health information. The NHS figures showing 1.5 million prevented missed appointments and 1.7 million staff hours saved demonstrate just how transformative this innovation can be.

    While this digital progress is vital and the 20% increase in hospital participation is welcome, we must also ensure no one is left behind. Digital access remains a barrier for many, so we welcome the initiative providing support for online health services at 1,400 libraries across England. This kind of practical support needs to remain a key priority as services continue to modernise.

    Updates to this page

    Published 28 April 2025

    MIL OSI United Kingdom

  • MIL-Evening Report: Is Canada heading down a path that has caused the collapse of mighty civilizations in the past?

    Source: The Conversation (Au and NZ) – By Daniel Hoyer, Senior Researcher, Historian and Complexity Scientist, University of Toronto

    Canada is, by nearly any measure, a large, advanced, prosperous nation. A founding member of the G7, Canada is one of the world’s most “advanced economies,” ranking fourth in the Organization for Economic Co-operation and Development’s Better Life Index, which measures things like national health outcomes, security, safety and life satisfaction.

    However, all of this prosperity and ostensible stability can mask social tensions, which can simmer for years, even decades, before boiling over into widespread unrest, civil violence and even societal collapse.

    Along with more than a dozen collaborators as part of the Seshat: Global History Databank project, I have spent over a decade studying the rise and fall of societies from around the globe and throughout history. This provides a unique insight to understand the challenges facing modern nations.

    Our new organization, Societal Dynamics (SoDy), works to translate what we learn from observing historical patterns into lessons for today.

    Even the most powerful empires can collapse

    Devoting my time to studying historic crises has shown me just how fragile societies are. Even big, powerful, famous civilizations can succumb to crises.

    For instance, colleagues recently published a study comparing three large, wealthy imperial powers of the past: the Roman, Han and Aztec Empires.

    Historians consider these to be some of the most successful, wealthy, stable societies of the pre-modern world.

    They lasted centuries, controlled vast stretches of territory, oversaw innovations in technology, politics and philosophy and produced some of the most famous works of art and architecture from history that we still talk about today — the incredible Roman Colosseum, the stunning jade carvings and other artwork of the Han period and the amazing Aztec pyramids and intricate artwork.

    But not long after they reached their apex, all three of these mighty civilizations experienced devastating crises:

    Rome was torn apart by civil warfare starting in the early third century CE. Ambitious military generals from the provinces marched on each other, looking to gain even more power. They were supported by legions of loyal soldiers dissatisfied with their lot in life.

    Western Han imperial rule came to a crashing end in the 9 CE when a wealthy and prominent courtier named Wang Mang led a successful coup. As in Rome, Wang rallied military leaders and officials frustrated in their ambitions. He amassed a large following of commoners weary of impoverishment by decrying the luxurious excesses of the Han court.

    Aztec authority was already weakened by civil strife by the time the invading Spanish armies arrived in 1519 CE. The Aztecs ultimately proved unable to withstand the vicious warfare and disease outbreaks that accompanied the Spanish arrival.

    Hidden vulnerabilities

    What happened to these once-mighty empires? The aforementioned study gives some answers. The authors explored the distribution of wealth and income in these empires, comparing it to the modern United States.

    They found that each of these empires permitted fairly high disparities to accumulate.

    In each case, the richest five per cent and one per cent of citizens controlled an outsized share of their society’s wealth. This leads to fairly high “gini index” values as well. The gini is a commonly used measure of inequality in nations — the higher the number up to one, the more inequitable a society is. For comparison, the current average gini among OECD countries is 0.32, notably lower than each of the four societies shown above.

    The researchers suggest this high level of inequality contributed to the eventual collapse of these empires.

    This is consistent with our own findings on the dynamics of crisis. Inequality tends to breed frustration as impoverishment spreads.

    It creates conflict as the upper classes become bloated with too many wealthy and powerful families vying for control of the vast spoils that accumulate at the top. It also erodes society’s ability to respond to acute shocks like ecological disasters or economic downturns as the government loses capacity and authority.

    If allowed to persist, it becomes more and more likely for the society to end in collapse.

    How does Canada compare?

    Canada today bears several similarities with these and other famous civilizations of the past — and that should make Canadians nervous.

    Canada, like the Romans, Han, Aztecs and many other once great societies, has maintained a relatively peaceful and secure rule over a large territory for a time. It’s generated a great deal of wealth, has facilitated the exchange of technology, ideas and movement of people over vast distances and has produced amazing works of art. But Canada has also allowed inequality to grow and linger for generations.

    My group has been exploring the historic patterns of wealth creation and distribution in different countries, including Canada. We focus on what’s known as the “Palma ratio,” generally considered a more reliable measure of inequality than the gini.

    The measurement quantifies the ratio of wealth or income between the richest 10 per cent and the poorest 40 per cent of citizens. Higher numbers indicate that the richest are capturing the lion’s share of a country’s overall wealth.

    Canada’s economy has been growing steadily as measured by GDP per capita — with a few notable exceptions — since the Second World War.

    Initially, inequality held steady, but starting in about 1980, the Palma ratio jumps up sharply. This suggests the bulk of this growth was making its way into the hands of the wealthy. After a downturn in the late 2000s, inequality has begun to grow again in recent years.

    By comparison, the U.S. has experienced similar trends, though without the momentary downturn in the 2000s. Note also that these two graphs show different levels — the Palma ratio in the U.S. in 2022 (the latest available data) is about 4.5, while it’s just over two in Canada.

    Heading down a dangerous path

    Most citizens living in the heyday of these once mighty empires probably thought that collapse was unfathomable, just as few living in the U.S. or Canada today feel that we’re headed that way.

    But there have been familiar signs growing in the U.S. in recent years. Americans appear to be further ahead on the road to a potential collapse than Canadians are, but not by that much.

    Canada is starting to exhibit many of these same indicators as well, including significant spikes in social unrest evident during the COVID-19 pandemic and the increasingly hostile rhetoric we have seen among Canadian politicians. Persistent, heightened material inequality stands out as core driver in all of these cases.




    Read more:
    The ‘freedom convoy’ protesters are a textbook case of ‘aggrieved entitlement’


    Canada remains, in many ways, a stable, thriving, modern democratic-socialist country. But it’s on a dangerous path.

    If Canada allows inequality continue to rise unchecked as it has over the last few generations, it risks ending up where Rome, Han, the Aztecs and hundreds of other societies have been before: widespread unrest, devastating violence and even complete societal collapse.

    As Canadians head to the polls, the country is at another crossroads. Will it continue down this all-too-familiar path, or will it take the opportunity to forge a different route and avoid the fate of the fallen societies of the past?

    Daniel Hoyer is director of SoDy and affiliated with ASRA Network, Complexity Science Hub, Vienna, and the SocialAI lab at the University of Toronto. He has received funding from: the Tricoastal Foundation; the Institute for Economics and Peace; and the V. Kann Rasmussen Foundation.

    ref. Is Canada heading down a path that has caused the collapse of mighty civilizations in the past? – https://theconversation.com/is-canada-heading-down-a-path-that-has-caused-the-collapse-of-mighty-civilizations-in-the-past-254378

    MIL OSI AnalysisEveningReport.nz

  • MIL-Evening Report: Australia once had ‘immigration amnesties’ to grant legal status to undocumented people. Could we again?

    Source: The Conversation (Au and NZ) – By Sara Dehm, Senior Lecturer, International Migration and Refugee Law, University of Technology Sydney

    The year is 1972. The Whitlam Labor government has just been swept into power and major changes to Australia’s immigration system are underway. Many people remember this time for the formal end of the racist White Australia Policy.

    A lesser-known legacy of this period was the introduction of Australia’s first immigration amnesty. This amnesty, implemented later in 1974 with bilateral support, provided humane pathways to permanency or citizenship for undocumented people in Australia.

    In other words, people living without lawful immigration status could “legalise” their status without risk of punishment or deportation.

    More immigration amnesties were promised during later election campaigns and then implemented in 1976 and 1980.

    These amnesties occurred under successive Labor and Liberal federal governments, and each enjoyed enthusiastic bipartisan support.

    So, how did these amnesties work – and could they happen again?

    Started by Whitlam

    Australia’s first amnesty was announced in January 1974, as part of the Whitlam government’s official policy of multiculturalism.

    Its purpose was to grant permanency to people who had been living in Australia “illegally” and at risk of labour exploitation.

    The amnesty was open for five months, from late January until the end of June 1974.

    The main eligibility criteria was that the person:

    • had to have been living in Australia for three years or more and
    • be of “good character”.

    This program had only a modest uptake. However, it set the path for more successful initiatives in the future.

    Continued by Fraser

    During the 1975 election campaign, then caretaker Prime Minister Malcolm Fraser promised another amnesty if his government won the election.

    He committed to “do everything we can” to allow undocumented people

    to stay here and make Australia their permanent home.

    After the election, Fraser’s Liberal government implemented a broad amnesty for “overstayed visitors” in January 1976.

    Departmental figures show 8,614 people sought legal status in the amnesty period.

    The vast majority (63%) lived in New South Wales. The main nationalities of these applicants were:

    • Greek (1,283 applicants)
    • UK (911 applicants)
    • Indonesian (748 applicants)
    • Chinese (643 applicants).

    Australia’s third broad immigration amnesty came in 1980, again as a result of a bipartisan election promise.

    Immigration Minister Ian Macphee announced a six-month Regularisation of Status Program. It aimed, he said, to deal “humanely with the problem of illegal immigration” while also seeking to curb such unauthorised migration in the future.

    Not a trick

    Many migrants worried these amnesties were a government “trick” to facilitate deportations.

    In an attempt to reassure the public, Prime Minister Fraser insisted in 1980 that the program was

    not a trap to lure people into the open so that they can be seized, jailed and deported.

    By the end of the amnesty period in December 1980, it was reported that more than 11,000 applications had been received. This covered more than 14,000 people.

    What made the past amnesties successful?

    Our research looked at what motivated the amnesties and how they worked.

    We found several key factors that drove success, including the need for:

    • simple and inclusive criteria for eligibility
    • a clear application process
    • a careful campaign for promotion, to build trust with migrant communities, and
    • durable outcomes that offer of clear pathways to citizenship.

    The 1980 amnesty program involved an effective campaign to publicise successful cases.

    A 21-year-old Greek waitress working in her aunt’s Goulburn restaurant was widely publicised as the first person to be granted immigration amnesty status in July 1980. A Uruguayan refugee was profiled as the 1,000th.

    The Department of Immigration also translated amnesty information into 48 languages, publicised in non-English language press and radio.

    Of the three amnesties, the 1974 one was the least successful, due to:

    • stringent eligibility criteria
    • limited media publicity, and
    • no official outreach strategy to build trust with migrant communities.

    Precarious lives

    Recent calls for an immigration amnesty has focused on two groups in Australia:

    The Department of Home Affairs estimates more than 70,000 people live in Australia today without immigration status.

    Undocumented workers are highly vulnerable to exploitation and deportation.

    Yet, these workers often fulfil crucial labour market shortages. Many have been living in Australia for years or even decades.

    Asylum seekers and refugees on temporary or no visas cannot return “home” for fear of persecution. They risk lapsing into irregular status with no rights or entitlements.

    Lessons from past amnesties

    Amnesties are a humane and cost-effective response to unauthorised migration.

    Australia currently spends millions, if not billions of dollars, on the detention and deportation of people without visas.

    In the lead up to both the 1976 and 1980 amnesties, successive governments acknowledged such a “detection and deportation” approach would be unnecessarily costly. It would require “increased resources in manpower”.

    An amnesty, instead, was in the words of then Immigration Minister Macphee a chance to:

    clean the slate, to acknowledge that no matter how people got here they are part of the community.

    These historical precedents show Australia’s migration system and politicians could, if they wanted, accommodate initiatives and reforms that fundamentally value migrants and prioritise migrant access to permanency.

    Our research also shows Australian election campaigns can be opportunities for advancing policies that embrace the reality of immigration and offer hope, not fear.

    Sara Dehm receives funding from the Australian Research Council. She is a co-convenor of the interdisciplinary academic network, Academics for Refugees.

    Anthea Vogl receives funding from the Australian Research Council and the Commonwealth Departure of Health and Aged Care. She is a Board Member of the Forcibly Displaced People Network and co-convenor of the interdisciplinary academic network, Academics for Refugees.

    ref. Australia once had ‘immigration amnesties’ to grant legal status to undocumented people. Could we again? – https://theconversation.com/australia-once-had-immigration-amnesties-to-grant-legal-status-to-undocumented-people-could-we-again-252294

    MIL OSI AnalysisEveningReport.nz

  • MIL-OSI Global: Why seniors’ care should have been on the election agenda

    Source: The Conversation – Canada – By Pat Armstrong, Distinguished Research Professor of Sociology, York University, Canada

    I was hopeful that when the COVID-19 pandemic drew attention to the plight of senior citizens, the attention might result in meaningful change. Instead, seniors seem to be getting blamed for high costs and high living.

    Let me set some context. The Canada Health Act is a remarkable document. It is simple and clear. Provinces must adhere to the principles of universal, reasonable access to comprehensive hospital and doctor care throughout Canada, without charge for medically necessary care and with funding from a publicly administered, non-profit health insurance plan.

    Those with a health-care card can go to any hospital or doctor and do not have to worry about health-care bankruptcy or losing health-care coverage if they change jobs or travel across Canada. Because the rich use the same beds as everyone else, they have a vested interest in all beds being high quality.

    A good start with good principles

    The CHA and the public insurance programs that preceded it dramatically improved access to quality care, quality jobs and — not incidentally in these times — it promoted solidarity across ages, classes and genders through what became Canada’s best loved social program.

    Of course, it was not perfect or perfectly equitable, but it was a good start with good principles.

    However, there are three basic problems with it. First, it was supposed to be the first step towards a system that covered home care, long-term care, eye, dental and pharmaceutical care, but it stalled there until very recently. Second, the principles depended on the federal government using its spending power for enforcement. And third, it failed to prohibit for-profit services being paid public money or doctors from operating in private practices.

    So when the federal government started tinkering with funding, changing from providing cash to match half provincial costs and instead offering provinces tax room, that made both federal contributions and provincial spending harder to track. When Ottawa then failed to keep up funding, provinces and territories started defining hospital and doctor care more and more narrowly, moving care out of the hospitals where the principles no longer applied.

    Increasingly, more necessary care had user fees or lacked public financial support. More of it was for-profit; more of it provided lower quality jobs and lower quality care, undermining solidarity in the process. This is especially the case for seniors, whose care needs are increasingly defined as chronic rather than acute and therefore not requiring hospital care. Racialized and immigrant older women are especially likely to have low incomes, making them unable to buy care.

    Seniors’ election issues

    Which brings me to this federal election and seniors, and to issues that are being swamped by a focus on assembling cars and making tax cuts.

    There are gaping holes in access to care at home and in long-term care as well as to hospital care and primary care services. And equally important, there is less access to good jobs providing this care.

    We hear a lot about how care at home is everyone’s first choice, but staying at home often requires skilled care, special facilities and support for things like food, cleaning and maintenance, as well as help with dressing and walking. Too often, what we mean by care at home is 24/7 care by female relatives, untrained and unpaid for the work, too often doing so to the detriment of their own health and economic future.

    Too often it is about shifting costs and labour to families and individuals, not about choice or overall cost savings. Too often there is no choice.

    There has been new federal money for health care, a significant amount of which is unconditional and thus available for home care. But we have seen little effective expansion.

    The recently appointed Health Workforce Canada seems primarily focused on getting better data and more migrants to provide care, rather than improving the conditions of work that are vital to attracting and keeping the staff.

    If we are serious about home as the place to be, we need to provide the public support for the option, support that needs to go well beyond a few more temporary work permits for care providers.

    Although remaining at home is many people’s first choice, people in long-term care say the benefits include feeling safe, there is company, there are activities, and women especially say there is someone to clean the bathroom and make the meals.
    (Shutterstock)

    Nursing homes

    Which takes me to nursing homes. At the same time as home care is talked about as the first choice, nursing homes are presented as the last and worst choice. We forget though that many people do not have homes, many homes are unsafe physically and/or in terms of abuse, many homes are isolating, and many people have 24-hour extensive care needs that cannot be accommodated in a private home.

    When we ask residents about whether there is anything better about nursing homes compared to their private home, many say yes; they feel safe, there is company, there are activities, and women especially say there is someone to clean the bathroom and make the meals. Of course, we can and should make nursing homes better for people to live, work and visit in them, but we can’t forget that we need them and significantly more of them as well as more people to work in them.

    The federal government did fund the development of new standards for nursing homes but then it has done little with those standards. We need more beds, more staff and enforced standards. As with hospital care, the federal government could use its spending power to play a critical role, doing so through the promised safe long-term care act.

    And we need more community care clinics providing the full range of services. Here too the federal government has signed some targeted funding agreements but we need more and we need to severely limit private practice that contributes to fragmented care.

    Care vs. profit

    And in all these areas, we need to ensure the money goes to care rather than to profit.

    Of course good and fair health care costs money. But we have to remember that investments in care are an investment in the economy, in equity and in solidarity. The money does not go into a hole. It circulates in the economy. And investments in providing good conditions of work can save money at the same time as they promote care, given that the conditions of work are the conditions of care.

    We need to put senior care back on the agenda in the aftermath of this election.

    Pat Armstrong receives funding from SSHRC

    I am a Board member of the Canadian Health Coalition and a member of the economic subgroup of the Ottawa Council on Aging

    ref. Why seniors’ care should have been on the election agenda – https://theconversation.com/why-seniors-care-should-have-been-on-the-election-agenda-255220

    MIL OSI – Global Reports

  • MIL-OSI Global: Skilled migrants are leaving the U.S. for Canada — how can the north gain from the brain drain?

    Source: The Conversation – Canada – By Ashika Niraula, Senior Research Associate, Canada Excellence Research Chair in Migration & Integration Program, Toronto Metropolitan University

    Skilled migrants and international students are leaving the United States for Canada in growing numbers. A March 2025 report by Statistics Canada reveals a sharp rise in the numbers of American non-citizen residents moving to Canada. Reasons given are largely restrictive U.S. immigration policies, visa caps and long wait times for green cards.

    This is a shift from earlier decades when American-born citizens dominated the trend. By 2019, nearly half of those making the move were U.S. non-citizen residents.

    Since U.S. President Donald Trump’s election win and early days in office, Google searches by American residents on how to move to Canada, New Zealand and Australia have surged.

    Several high-profile academics have relocated to Canadian universities amid growing concerns over threats to academic freedom.

    British Columbia recently announced plans to launch landmark policies to streamline the credential recognition process for internationally trained health-care professionals, particular American doctors and nurses.

    Skilled talent like health-care professionals, researchers and engineers are essential to building innovative, future-ready economies. But attracting them requires staying competitive in an increasingly global bid for talent.

    Global competition for talent

    In this global race for talent, Canada and Australia need to offer not only efficient immigration pathways but also faster credential recognition and better integration support.

    Yet both nations find themselves walking a tightrope. Once both celebrated as welcoming destinations for global talent, each country has experienced recent immigration restrictions and growing anti-immigration sentiments, undermining those reputations.




    Read more:
    Canada at a crossroads: Understanding the shifting sands of immigration attitudes


    What can these countries learn from each other to stay competitive and benefit from this talent flow?

    Research from Toronto Metropolitan University’s Migration and Integration Program shows Canada’s appeal for skilled migrants is rooted in a mix of practical and aspirational factors. This includes a combination of high living standards, the promise of better career prospects, more accessible permanent residency pathways and a broadly welcoming society.

    But for migrants in Canada, these goals are becoming harder to attain.

    A more cautious approach

    Since the pandemic, Canada’s immigration approach has shifted. During the early COVID-19 years, Canada was praised for its inclusive response, including recognizing immigrants as essential to economic recovery. Temporary workers, including essential workers, international student graduates and French-speaking immigrants, were offered new routes to permanent residency through a federal program.

    However, since 2024, Canada has taken a more cautious approach.

    New policy changes that target international students and cut temporary and permanent migration numbers have tarnished Canada’s global reputation as a welcoming place.

    While permanent residency is still more accessible than in the U.S., skilled migrants are increasingly questioning whether the wait for permanent residency is worth it.

    Australia visa rules slow things down

    Australia faces similar dilemmas. In late 2023, the government launched a new migration strategy to address critical workforce shortages in construction, tech and health care. The Skills in Demand visa promised faster processing and clearer pathways to permanent residency for workers in priority sectors.

    Yet a recent report by the Grattan institute warns that tighter eligibility rules risk excluding much-needed talent, potentially weakening Australia’s competitiveness.

    Growing visa delays are also noted to be an additional barrier that may deter both prospective migrants and employers.

    Working in jobs far below qualifications

    Migration data often tells a story of numbers, categories and eligibility thresholds. However, the human stories behind the numbers reveal deep systemic issues and missed opportunities. One recurring issue is the widespread phenomenon of deskilling.

    In both Canada and Australia, many skilled migrants often find themselves working in jobs far below their qualifications.

    These experiences are part of a pattern that affects not only individuals but also national economies, which lose out on the full potential of their skilled workforce.

    Credential recognition systems are opaque, inconsistent and frequently biased.

    Another overlooked issue is that many skilled migrants do not move alone. People arrive with spouses, children and sometimes elderly parents.

    Yet immigration and settlement systems in both countries are largely structured around individual economic migrants rather than families. In Canada, for instance, federally funded settlement services are mainly geared toward supporting only permanent residents.

    Many spouses, particularly women, face even greater barriers to employment. Issues also include things like high fees for visa processing for parents. Other considerations include children who may struggle with schooling and identity in unfamiliar environments.

    Housing shortages and high costs in major urban centres compound these challenges, pushing newcomers into unaffordable living conditions.

    All this contributes to growing disillusionment. Migrants initially drawn to Canada or Australia as alternatives to unwelcoming environments elsewhere may choose to still come, but it doesn’t mean they will stay.




    Read more:
    Canada halts new parent immigration sponsorships, keeping families apart


    Learning from each other: Canada and Australia

    The experiences of skilled migrants in Canada and Australia show that attracting talent is only half the battle. The real challenge is in retention and integration.

    Many countries like Germany, Japan, South Korea and some Gulf states have begun offering more competitive pathways to immigration along with promises of a work-life balance, streamlined visa programs and competitive salaries. This means skilled migrants are increasingly mobile.




    Read more:
    The states want a bigger say in skilled migration – but doing that actually leaves them worse off


    Australia has made strides in streamlining visa categories and targeting sectoral needs, while Canada has built a strong narrative around inclusion and multiculturalism.

    However, there is a need to combine Australia’s responsiveness and Canada’s inclusive ethos to build resilient migration systems.

    Build future-ready migration systems

    In an era defined by geopolitical uncertainties, countries can no longer afford to treat skilled migrants as temporary fixes or just economic inputs. They are people with aspirations, with families and with dreams.

    They must be seen and supported as future citizens. To build future-ready migration systems Canada must:

    • Ensure transparency and consistency in immigration pathways to reduce uncertainties caused by policy reversals and lengthy processing times.

    • Improve credential recognition and career support to help skilled migrants, including temporary residents, transition into roles that match their qualifications.

    • Develop regional settlement strategies to address where migrants settle and ensure equitable access to services, job markets and housing, especially outside major cities.

    • Adopt inclusive, intersectional policies that consider gender, race and class in shaping the migrant experience, including support for spouses, children and aging parents.

    • Foster collaborative and responsive policymaking. This involves connecting researchers, employers, community organizations and migrants to inform policy making.

    For Canada, the challenge ahead is clear. It’s not just about opening the door. It’s about making sure that once here, migrants have the support, rights and opportunities to walk through that door — and thrive.

    ​Ashika Niraula works as a Senior Research Associate at the Canada Excellence Research Chair in Migration & Integration Program at Toronto Metropolitan University. The Skilled Migrant Decision Making Under Uncertainty project has received financial support from the Social Sciences and Humanities Research Council Insight Grant (435-2021-0752) and from the wider program of the Canada Excellence Research Chair in Migration and Integration at Toronto Metropolitan University.

    Iori Hamada does not work for, consult, own shares in or receive funding from any company or organisation that would benefit from this article, and has disclosed no relevant affiliations beyond their academic appointment.

    ref. Skilled migrants are leaving the U.S. for Canada — how can the north gain from the brain drain? – https://theconversation.com/skilled-migrants-are-leaving-the-u-s-for-canada-how-can-the-north-gain-from-the-brain-drain-254435

    MIL OSI – Global Reports

  • MIL-OSI Asia-Pac: World Veterinary Day 2025: National Workshop in New Delhi Honours Veterinarians behind India’s Livestock Powerhouse

    Source: Government of India

    World Veterinary Day 2025: National Workshop in New Delhi Honours Veterinarians behind India’s Livestock Powerhouse

    “Veterinarians Are the Backbone of Rural Economy”: Prof. S.P. Singh Baghel Calls for Stronger Veterinary Infrastructure and Skills in the Livestock Sector

    Need to Focus on Indigenous Breeds, 100% IVF Adoption and Enhancing Veterinary Role in FMD Eradication : Prof. S.P. Singh Baghel

    Posted On: 26 APR 2025 6:40PM by PIB Delhi

    In a tribute to the silent sentinels of India’s livestock economy, the Department of Animal Husbandry and Dairying under the Ministry of Fisheries, Animal Husbandry and Dairying, celebrated the World Veterinary Day 2025 with a National Workshop in New Delhi today.

    The event was inaugurated by Prof. S. P. Singh Baghel, Union Minister of State for Fisheries, Animal Husbandry and Dairying and Panchayati Raj, who hailed the veterinary community as the “backbone of rural economy and national biosecurity.” India is home to over 536 million livestock, the largest in the world and nearly 70% of rural households depend on animals for income, food, and security. Yet, the people who ensure those animals remain healthy are rarely in the headlines, he added. Union Minister of State in his address said that “There is no healthy India without healthy animals,” while emphasizing upon the government’s commitment to modernizing veterinary infrastructure, enhancing skill development, and future-proofing India’s animal health systems.  Highlighting this year’s theme, “Animal Health Takes a Team,” he stressed the importance of collaborative efforts among veterinarians, para-veterinary staff, scientists, and public health professionals to ensure integrated animal, human, and environmental health. Prof. Baghel spotlighted key initiatives under the national vaccination program like the National Animal Disease Control Programme (NADCP), which aims to eliminate Foot and Mouth Disease (FMD) by 2030, noting that over 114.56 crore FMD vaccines and 4.57 crore Brucellosis vaccines have been administered in the country so far. The NADCP aims to control FMD by 2025 and eradicate it by 2030 with vaccination.

    Prof. S.P. Singh Baghel emphasized the vital role of indigenous breeds of livestock in strengthening the country’s animal husbandry sector. He noted that these breeds are not only well-adapted to local climatic conditions but also play a crucial role in ensuring sustainable and resilient livestock production systems. He stressed the importance of adopting advanced reproductive technologies, particularly the use of sex-sorted semen, goal of achieving 100% use of in vitro fertilization (IVF) to enhance productivity and breed quality. The Union Minister of State praised the use of digital platforms like the National Digital Livestock Mission (Bharat Pashudhan) for traceability and disease monitoring. Addressing the rising threat of zoonotic diseases, he emphasized India’s adoption of the One Health approach, commending veterinarians for their role in disease surveillance, inter-sectoral coordination, and early warning systems to protect public health.

    Joining the national workshop virtually Secretary, Department of Animal Husbandry and Dairying (DAHD) Ms. Alka Upadhyaya called for a comprehensive overhaul of India’s veterinary ecosystem. Speaking at the World Veterinary Day 2025 event, she emphasized that veterinarians have significantly contributed to enhancing livestock productivity, making India the largest dairy producer globally, second in table egg production, and the fourth-largest meat producer. While India has become aatmanirbhar in advanced technologies such as IVF, sex-sorted semen, cattle immunization, and dairy equipment manufacturing, the Secretary highlighted the acute shortage of veterinary professionals across the country. She urged for an increase in veterinary education seats, the establishment of state-of-the-art facilities in veterinary colleges, and a curriculum that provides students with practical expertise in surgeries and livestock medical care. She further advocated for stronger public-private partnerships, and more academic conferences to modernize veterinary education. She also laid emphasis on mainstreaming of animal welfare initiatives while improving productivity.  Addressing the growing threat of zoonotic diseases, Ms. Alka Upadhyaya stressed upon the need for a strong surveillance system, synchronized vaccination programs across states. “Veterinarians are the first line of defense in ensuring national biosecurity,” she concluded.

    Joining virtually from Rome, Dr. Thanawat Tiensin, Assistant Director-General and Chief Veterinarian at the Food and Agriculture Organization (FAO), lauded India’s pivotal role in global One Health efforts, and praised the country’s recent recognition under the Pandemic Fund for Animal Health Preparedness, a major global endorsement of India’s leadership in veterinary public health.

    In his address, Dr. Abhijit Mitra, Animal Husbandry Commissioner and Chairman of the Animal Welfare Board of India, highlighted India’s progress in mass vaccination campaigns, early disease detection, and the use of digital tracking systems to strengthen animal health services. He emphasized the role of veterinarians as the unseen protectors of food systems and crucial defenders against future pandemics. He drew attention to the vital connection between animal welfare and public health, asserting that animal welfare is not just an act of compassion but a fundamental pillar for ensuring food safety and healthier livestock.

    This year’s global theme of World Veterinary Day 2025 is “Animal Health Takes a Team”, underscores the idea that animal health isn’t a solo mission; it’s a collective national effort involving vets, scientists, public health experts and farmers. The event spotlighted the power of collaboration in protecting animal health, recognising that veterinarians, scientists, public health experts, and farmers form an interdependent network that safeguards not only livestock but the health and economy of the nation. The workshop also featured high-impact technical sessions on Use of Generic Medicines in animal husbandry to improve accessibility and affordability, the veterinarian’s role in preventing zoonotic transmission of diseases like avian influenza, strengthening Integrated Disease Surveillance and data sharing between human and animal health sectors alongside an engaging online national quiz, connecting hundreds of young veterinary students to the national conversation.

    The event was also attended by distinguished dignitaries and stakeholders, including, Ms. Varsha Joshi, Additional Secretary, DAHD, Dr. Ramashankar Sinha, Additional Secretary, DAHD along with other senior officials from ICAR, National Veterinary Councils, FAO, WOAH, WHO and Directors of national research institutes and Vice Chancellors of several veterinary universities. The event saw participation from over 250 delegates and was live-streamed across India, attracting more than 3,000 virtual attendees including veterinary professionals, students, researchers, and farmers reflecting growing public awareness and interest in animal health.

    ****

    Aditi Agrawal

    (Release ID: 2124587) Visitor Counter : 51

    MIL OSI Asia Pacific News

  • MIL-OSI Asia-Pac: AMS anniversary open day held

    Source: Hong Kong Information Services

    The Auxiliary Medical Service (AMS) today held an open day event to celebrate the 75th anniversary of its establishment, with activities aimed at enhancing the public’s awareness of national security and deepening their understanding of its services.
     
    Secretary for Health Prof Lo Chung-mau said at the event that the AMS provides a wide range of services to the public, such as participation in anti-epidemic operations during the COVID-19 pandemic and deployment to hospitals to assist healthcare professionals during the influenza seasons.
     
    The other regular duties of the AMS consists of giving first aid coverage during large-scale public events, in country parks and cycling tracks during weekends and public holidays.
     
    He added that training of the AMS has well-equipped its members to respond to challenges involving national security risks and emergencies such as “biosecurity” and “nuclear security” at any time.
     
    The open day activities included game booths, medical seminars, health screenings, healthcare professional symposiums and display of emergency vehicles, giving the visitors access to health information and insights into developments in healthcare professions.

    MIL OSI Asia Pacific News

  • MIL-Evening Report: How to fight Trump’s cyber dystopia with community, self-determination, care and truth

    COMMENTARY: By Mandy Henk

    When the US Embassy knocked on my door in late 2024, I was both pleased and more than a little suspicious.

    I’d worked with them before, but the organisation where I did that work, Tohatoha, had closed its doors. My new project, Dark Times Academy, was specifically an attempt to pull myself out of the grant cycle, to explore ways of funding the work of counter-disinformation education without dependence on unreliable governments and philanthropic funders more concerned with their own objectives than the work I believed then — and still believe — is crucial to the future of human freedom.

    But despite my efforts to turn them away, they kept knocking, and Dark Times Academy certainly needed the money. I’m warning you all now: There is a sense in which everything I have to say about counter-disinformation comes down to conversations about how to fund the work.

    DARK TIMES ACADEMY

    There is nothing I would like more than to talk about literally anything other than funding this work. I don’t love money, but I do like eating, having a home, and being able to give my kids cash.

    I have also repeatedly found myself in roles where other people look to me for their livelihoods; a responsibility that I carry heavily and with more than a little clumsiness and reluctance.

    But if we are to talk about President Donald Trump and disinformation, we have to talk about money. As it is said, the love of money is the root of all evil. And the lack of it is the manifestation of that evil.

    Trump and his attack on all of us — on truth, on peace, on human freedom and dignity — is, at its core, an attack that uses money as a weapon. It is an attack rooted in greed and in avarice.

    In his world, money is power
    But in that greed lies his weakness. In his world, money is power. He and those who serve him and his fascist agenda cannot see beyond the world that money built. Their power comes in the form of control over that world and the people forced to live in it.

    Of course, money is just paper. It is digital bits in a database sitting on a server in a data centre relying on electricity and water taken from our earth. The ephemeral nature of their money speaks volumes about their lack of strength and their vulnerability to more powerful forces.

    They know this. Trump and all men like him know their weaknesses — and that’s why they use their money to gather power and control. When you have more money than you and your whānau can spend in several generations, you suddenly have a different kind of  relationship to money.

    It’s one where money itself — and the structures that allow money to be used for control of people and the material world — becomes your biggest vulnerability. If your power and identity are built entirely on the power of money, your commitment to preserving the power of money in the world becomes an all-consuming drive.

    Capitalism rests on many “logics” — commodification, individualism, eternal growth, the alienation of labour. Marx and others have tried this ground well already.

    In a sense, we are past the time when more analysis is useful to us. Rather, we have reached a point where action is becoming a practical necessity. After all, Trump isn’t going to stop with the media or with counter-disinformation organisations. He is ultimately coming for us all.

    What form that action must take is a complicated matter. But, first we must think about money and about how money works, because only through lessening the power of money can we hope to lessen the power of those who wield it as their primary weapon.

    Beliefs about poor people
    If you have been so unfortunate to be subject to engagement with anti-poverty programmes during the neoliberal era either as a client or a worker, you will know that one of the motivations used for denying direct cash aid to those in need of money is a belief on the part of government and policy experts that poor people will use their money in unwise ways, be it drugs or alcohol, or status purchases like sneakers or manicures.

    But over and over again, there’s another concern raised: cash benefits will be spent on others in the community, but outside of those targeted with the cash aid.

    You see this less now that ideas like a universal basic income (UBI) and direct cash transfers have taken hold of the policy and donor classes, but it is one of those rightwing concerns that turned out to be empirically accurate.

    Poor people are more generous with their money and all of their other resources as well. The stereotype of the stingy Scrooge is one based on a pretty solid mountain of evidence.

    The poor turn out to understand far better than the rich how to defeat the power that money gives those who hoard it — and that is community. The logic of money and capital can most effectively be defeated through the creation and strengthening of our community ties.

    Donald Trump and those who follow him revel in creating a world of atomised individuals focused on themselves; the kind of world where, rather than relying on each other, people depend on the market and the dollar to meet their material needs — dollars. of course, being the source of control and power for their class.

    Our ability to fund our work, feed our families, and keep a roof over our heads has not always been subject to the whims of capitalists and those with money to pay us. Around the world, the grand multicentury project known as colonialism has impoverished us all and created our dependency.

    Colonial projects and ‘enclosures’
    I cannot speak as a direct victim of the colonial project. Those are not my stories to tell. There are so many of you in this room who can speak to that with far more eloquence and direct experience than I. But the colonial project wasn’t only an overseas project for my ancestors.

    In England, the project was called “enclosure”.

    Enclosure is one of the core colonial logics. Enclosure takes resources (land in particular) that were held in common and managed collectively using traditional customs and hands them over to private control to be used for private rather than communal benefit. This process, repeated over and over around the globe, created the world we live in today — the world built on money.

    As we lose control over our access to what we need to live as the land that holds our communities together, that binds us to one another, is co-opted or stolen from us, we lose our power of self-determination. Self-governance, freedom, liberty — these are what colonisation and enclosure take from us when they steal our livelihoods.

    As part of my work, I keep a close eye on the approaches to counter-disinformation that those whose relationship to power is smoother than my own take. Also, in this the year of our Lord 2025, it is mandatory to devote at least some portion of each public talk to AI.

    I am also profoundly sorry to have to report that as far as I can tell, the only work on counter-disinformation still getting funding is work that claims to be able to use AI to detect and counter disinformation. It will not surprise you that I am extremely dubious about these claims.

    AI has been created through what has been called “data colonialism”, in that it relies on stolen data, just as traditional forms of colonialism rely on stolen land.

    Risks and dangers of AI
    AI itself — and I am speaking here specifically of generative AI — is being used as a tool of oppression. Other forms of AI have their own risks and dangers, but in this context, generative AI is quite simply a tool of power consolidation, of hollowing out of human skill and care, and of profanity, in the sense of being the opposite of sacred.

    Words, art, conversation, companionship — these are fiercely human things. For a machine to mimic these things is to transgress against all of our communities — all the more so when the machine is being wielded by people who speak openly of genocide and white supremacy.

    However, just as capitalism can be fought through community, colonialism can and has been fought through our own commitment to living our lives in freedom. It is fought by refusing their demands and denying their power, whether through the traditional tools of street protest and nonviolent resistance, or through simply walking away from the structures of violence and control that they have implemented.

    In the current moment, that particularly includes the technological tools that are being used to destroy our communities and create the data being used to enact their oppression. Each of us is free to deny them access to our lives, our hopes, and dreams.

    This version of colonisation has a unique weakness, in that the cyber dystopia they have created can be unplugged and turned off. And yet, we can still retain the parts of it that serve us well by building our own technological infrastructure and helping people use that instead of the kind owned and controlled by oligarchs.

    By living our lives with the freedom we all possess as human beings, we can deny these systems the symbolic power they rely on to continue.

    That said, this has limitations. This process of theft that underlies both traditional colonialism and contemporary data colonialism, rather than that of land or data, destroys our material base of support — ie. places to grow food, the education of our children, control over our intellectual property.

    Power consolidated upwards
    The outcome is to create ever more dependence on systems outside of our control that serve to consolidate power upwards and create classes of disposable people through the logic of dehumanisation.

    Disposable people have been a feature across many human societies. We see it in slaves, in cultures that use banishment and exile, and in places where imprisonment is used to enforce laws.

    Right now we see it in the United States being directed at scale towards those from Central and Latin America and around the world. The men being sent to the El Salvadorian gulag, the toddlers sent to immigration court without a lawyer, the federal workers tossed from their jobs — these are disposable people to Trump.

    The logic of colonialism relies on the process of dehumanisation; of denying the moral relevance of people’s identity and position within their communities and families. When they take a father from his family, they are dehumanising him and his family. They are denying the moral relevance of his role as a father and of his children and wife.

    When they require a child to appear alone before an immigration judge, they are dehumanising her by denying her the right to be recognised as a child with moral claims on the adults around her. When they say they want to transition federal workers from unproductive government jobs to the private sector, they are denying those workers their life’s work and identity as labourers whose work supports the common good.

    There was a time when I would point out that we all know where this leads, but we are there now. It has led there, although given the US incarceration rate for Black men, it isn’t unreasonable to argue that in fact for some people, the US has always been there. Fascism is not an aberration, it is a continuation. But the quickening is here. The expansion of dehumanisation and hate have escalated under Trump.

    Dehumanisaton always starts with words and  language. And Trump is genuinely — and terribly — gifted with language. His speeches are compelling, glittering, and persuasive to his audiences. With his words and gestures, he creates an alternate reality. When Trump says, “They’re eating the cats! They’re eating the dogs!”, he is using language to dehumanise Haitian immigrants.

    An alternate reality for migrants
    When he calls immigrants “aliens” he is creating an alternate reality where migrants are no longer human, no longer part of our communities, but rather outside of them, not fully human.

    When he tells lies and spews bullshit into our shared information system, those lies are virtually always aimed at creating a permission structure to deny some group of people their full humanity. Outrageous lie after outrageous lie told over and over again crumbles society in ways that we have seen over and over again throughout history.

    In Europe, the claims that women were consorting with the devil led to the witch trials and the burning of thousands of women across central and northern Europe. In Myanmar, claims that Rohinga Muslims were commiting rape, led to mass slaughter.

    Just as we fight the logics of capitalism with community and colonialism with a fierce commitment to our freedom, the power to resist dehumanisation is also ours. Through empathy and care — which is simply the material manifestation of empathy — we can defeat attempts to dehumanise.

    Empathy and care are inherent to all functioning societies — and they are tools we all have available to us. By refusing to be drawn into their hateful premises, by putting morality and compassion first, we can draw attention to the ridiculousness of their ideas and help support those targeted.

    Disinformation is the tool used to dehumanise. It always has been. During the COVID-19 pandemic when disinformation as a concept gained popularity over the rather older concept of propaganda, there was a real moment where there was a drive to focus on misinformation, or people who were genuinely wrong about usually public health facts. This is a way to talk about misinformation that elides the truth about it.

    There is an empirical reality underlying the tsunami of COVID disinformation and it is that the information was spread intentionally by bad actors with the goal of destroying the social bonds that hold us all together. State actors, including the United States under the first Trump administration, spread lies about COVID intentionally for their own benefit and at the cost of thousands if not millions of lives.

    Lies and disinformation at scale
    This tactic was not new then. Those seeking political power or to destroy communities for their own financial gain have always used lies and disinformation. But what is different this time, what has created unique risks, is the scale.

    Networked disinformation — the power to spread bullshit and lies across the globe within seconds and within a context where traditional media and sources of both moral and factual authority have been systematically weakened over decades of neoliberal attack — has created a situation where disinformation has more power and those who wield it can do so with precision.

    But just as we have the means to fight capitalism, colonialism, and dehumanisation, so too do we — you and I — have the tools to fight disinformation: truth, and accurate and timely reporting from trustworthy sources of information shared with the communities impacted in their own language and from their own people.

    If words and images are the chosen tools of dehumanisation and disinformation, then we are lucky because they are fighting with swords that we forged and that we know how to wield. You, the media, are the front lines right now. Trump will take all of our money and all of our resources, but our work must continue.

    Times like this call for fearlessness and courage. But more than that, they call on us to use all of the tools in our toolboxes — community, self-determination, care, and truth. Fighting disinformation isn’t something we can do in a vacuum. It isn’t something that we can depersonalise and mechanise. It requires us to work together to build a very human movement.

    I can’t deny that Trump’s attacks have exhausted me and left me depressed. I’m a librarian by training. I love sharing stories with people, not telling them myself. I love building communities of learning and of sharing, not taking to the streets in protest.

    More than anything else, I just want a nice cup of tea and a novel. But we are here in what I’ve seen others call “a coyote moment”. Like Wile E. Coyote, we are over the cliff with our legs spinning in the air.

    We can use this time to focus on what really matters and figure out how we will keep going and keep working. We can look at the blue sky above us and revel in what beauty and joy we can.

    Building community, exercising our self-determination, caring for each other, and telling the truth fearlessly and as though our very lives depend on it will leave us all the stronger and ready to fight Trump and his tidal wave of disinformation.

    Mandy Henk, co-founder of Dark Times Academy, has been teaching and learning on the margins of the academy for her whole career. As an academic librarian, she has worked closely with academics, students, and university administrations for decades. She taught her own courses, led her own research work, and fought for a vision of the liberal arts that supports learning and teaching as the things that actually matter. This article was originally presented as an invited address at the annual general meeting of the Asia Pacific Media Network on 24 April 2025.

    MIL OSI AnalysisEveningReport.nz

  • MIL-OSI Russia: Press Briefing Transcript: African Department, Spring Meetings 2025

    Source: IMF – News in Russian

    April 25, 2025

    PARTICIPANTS:

    Speaker: ABEBE AEMRO SELASSIE, Director, African Department, IMF

    Moderator: KWABENA AKUAMOAH-BOATENG, Communications Officer, IMF

    *  *  *  *  *

    MR. AKUAMOAH-BOATENG: Good morning, good afternoon, and good evening to all of you here in the room and those joining us online. My name is Kwabena Akuamoah-Boateng.  I am with the Communications Department of the IMF, and

    I will be your moderator for today. 

    Welcome to today’s press briefing on the Regional Economic Outlook for Sub-Saharan Africa. I am pleased to introduce Abebe Aemro Selassie, Director of the IMF’s African Department.  Abebe will share key insights from our new report titled Recovery Interrupted

    But before I turn to Abebe, a reminder that we have simultaneous interpretation in French and Portuguese, both online and in the room.  And the materials for this press briefing, the report, are all available online at IMF.org/Africa. Abebe, the floor is yours.

    MR. SELASSIE: Good morning and good afternoon to colleagues joining us from the region and beyond. Thank you for being here today for the release of our April Regional Economic Outlook for Sub-Saharan Africa.

    Six months ago, I highlighted our region’s sluggish growth, and the steep political and social hurdles governments had to overcome to push through essential reforms.  Today, that fragile recovery faces a new test: the surge of global policy uncertainty so profound it is reshaping the region’s growth trajectory.

    Just when policy efforts began to bear fruit, with regional growth exceeding expectations in 2024, the region’s hard-won recovery has been overtaken by a sudden realignment of global priorities, casting a shadow over the outlook.  We now expect growth in Sub-Saharan Africa to ease to 3.8 percent in 2025 and 4.2 percent in 2026, marked down from our October projections, and these have been driven largely by difficult external conditions: weaker demand abroad, softer commodity prices, and tighter financial markets.

    Any further increase in trade tensions or tightening of financial conditions in advanced economies could further dampen regional confidence, raise borrowing costs further, and delay investment.  Meanwhile, official development assistance to Sub-Saharan Africa is likely to decline further, placing extra strain on the most vulnerable population.

    These external headwinds come on top of longer-standing vulnerabilities. High debt levels constrain the ability of many countries to finance essential services and development priorities.  While inflationary pressures have moderated at the regional level, quite a few countries are still grappling with elevated inflation, necessitating a tighter monetary stance and careful fiscal policy.

    Against this challenging backdrop, our report underscores the importance of calibrating policies to balance growth, social development, and macroeconomic stability.  Building robust fiscal and external buffers is more important than ever, underpinned by credibility and consistency in policymaking.

    In particular, there is a premium on policies to strengthen resilience: mobilize domestic revenue, improve spending efficiency, and strengthen public finance management and fiscal framework and fiscal frameworks to lower borrowing costs.  Reforms that enhance growth, improve the business climate, and foster regional trade integration are also needed to lay the groundwork for private sector-led growth.  High growth is imperative to engender the millions of jobs our region needs. 

    A strong, stable, and prosperous Sub-Saharan Africa is important for its people but also the world.  It is the region that will be the main source of labor and incremental investment and consumption demand in the decades to come.  External support as the region goes through its demographic transition is of tremendous strategic importance for the future of our planet. 

    The Fund is doing its part to help, having dispersed over $65 billion since 2020 and more than $8 billion just over the last year.  Our policy advice and capacity development efforts support more countries still. 

    Thank you and I’m happy to answer your questions. 

    MR. AKUAMOAH-BOATENG: Thank you, Abebe. Before we turn to you for your questions, a couple of ground rules, please. If you want to ask a question, raise your hand, and we’ll come to you.  Identify yourself and your organization and please limit it to one question.  For those online, you can use the chat function, or you can also raise your hand, and then we’ll come to you.  I will start from my right. 

    QUESTIONER: Good morning.  Thank you for taking my question.  You mentioned several things in your report.  The recovery that is going on the continent as well as some of the challenges that the continent is facing and the dividends that the continent currently has in its youth.  Leaders on the continent are working — I was at an event yesterday where they are looking at ways to raise funds to develop projects.  So, what is your recommendation for projects?  We’re seeing a need for projects like this as well as revenue mobilization on the continent.  So, is your recommendation to leaders on the continent on how to source these funds that are needed, given that some of the advanced economies are cutting back? 

    MR. AKUAMOAH-BOATENG: All right, any related questions before we go to Abebe?

    QUESTIONER: Abebe, you just made the point that the recovery has been hit by these uncertainties.  Beyond just policy direction, is there any scope to do anything in terms of, for example, maybe you dispense some money though, but maybe a little more to expect — to countries that are coming off defaults and what have you to help in this recovery, even at such a time?  This is also aided by, beyond the fact that some are coming, they have no buffers whatsoever.  And then, coming from defaults, things become very difficult for some of these countries to even have the money to do this.  Could there be any extra funding, even if on a regional level, to back the policy prescriptions that you have proposed? 

    MR. SELASSIE: I think there’s two different points here. The first one is more of a broader meta point, whether financing is the only constraint that is hindering more investment, more robust economic activity, and job creation. Of course, financing plays a role, but it is not the only constraint. It depends on country-to-country circumstances, what sectors we are talking about.  But it really is important to recognize that there are many other things that can be done to engender higher growth to facilitate more investment. 

    One of the issues that we have seen in our region over the years is that a lot of growth has –in many countries– been driven by public spending and public investment for many years.  That, of course, has made a major contribution.  It has facilitated all the investment that we have seen in infrastructure, building schools, building clinics.  So, that has a role to play. But I would say that going forward it will be as important to see if we can find ways in which the private sector is the main engine of growth. So, there are reforms that can be done to facilitate this growth. 

    The second one I am sensing from both your questions is about the circumstance right now where a combination of cuts in aid [and] tighter financing conditions are causing dislocation [and difficulties for governments. We have been, more than anybody else, stressing just what a difficult environment our governments have been facing.  We have been talking about the brutal funding squeeze that countries are under.  It has ebbed a little bit and flowed, you know, like the external market conditions, for example. There have been periods when they have been opened and some of our market access countries have been able to borrow, and then other periods where they have been closed, and we are going through one right now.  And this is on top of the cuts in aid that we have seen and tighter domestic financing conditions.  

    When this more cyclical point is playing out, I think it’s important for countries to be a bit more measured in how they are seeking to tackle their development needs.  So, maybe it means a bit more relying on domestic revenue mobilization, expenditure prioritization when conditions are particularly difficult as they are now, and, as I said earlier, going back to see what can be done to find ways to engender growth over the medium-term.  But it is a difficult period, as we note in our report, and one that is causing quite a bit of dislocation to our countries. 

    MR. AKUAMOAH-BOATENG: I will come to the middle. The lady in the front.

    QUESTIONER: My first question is around recovery, of course, your reports are called “interrupted”.  So, with recovery slipping, growth downgraded, debt pressures mountain, is Sub-Saharan Africa at risk of another lost decade?  Because in your report you mentioned that the last four years have been quite turbulent for Africa, and we are trying to get back on track.  What is IMF’s message on bold actions that leaders must take now to avoid being left behind in the global economy and to avoid Africa being in a permanent state of vulnerability?  Because we always hear that we are in a permanent state of vulnerability.  Then for Nigeria, macros are under threat right now.  How can the government — what are your suggestions on how the government can actually push through deep reforms that deliver tangible growth for its people?  Of course, for your report, you did mention the millions and millions of people that you know live below $2.15 a day. 

    MR. AKUAMOAH-BOATENG: Any more Nigeria questions? I will take the gentleman right here.

    QUESTIONER: In your report you said that debt has stabilized.  And when you look at Nigeria’s debt profile, what insights can you share as to where the borrowings are going to?  Are you seeing more of long-term loans or short-term loans?  So that’s one.  So, what — recently the World Bank expressed concerns about the performance of Nigeria’s statistical body, saying that the institution is performing Sub optimally.  Do you share that sentiment?  Thank you very much. 

    MR. AKUAMOAH-BOATENG: I will take one more on Nigeria. The gentleman in the first row.

    QUESTIONER: I [would] like to know in specific terms, Nigeria has already undertaken several reforms, especially removed oil subsidies and floated the naira.  What more specific things do you expect of Nigeria in terms of reform?

    MR. AKUAMOAH-BOATENG: All right, thank you. Abebe?

    MR. SELASSIE: So, in terms of the reforms that have been going on in Nigeria and the particularities of the challenge, the first thing to note is that we have been really impressed by how much reforms have been undertaken in recent years. Most notably, trying to go to the heart of the cause of the macroeconomic imbalances in Nigeria, which are related to the fact that, oil subsidies were taking up a very large share of the limited tax revenues that the government have and not necessarily being used in the most effective way to help the most vulnerable people. The issues related to the imbalances on the external side with the exchange rate extremely out of line. 

    So it’s been really good to see the government taking these on, head-on, address those, and also beginning to roll out the third component of the reforms that we have been advocating for and of course, the government has been pursuing, which is to expand social protection, to target generalized subsidies to help the most vulnerable.  This has all been very good to see, but more can be done, particularly on the latter front, expanding social protection and enhancing a lot more transparency in the oil sector so that the removal of subsidies does translate into flow of revenue into the government budget.  So, there is still a bit more work to do in these areas. 

    We just had a mission in Nigeria where there was extensive discussions on these and other issues on the macroeconomic area, but also other areas where there is a need to do reforms to engender more private sector investment and also how more resources can be devoted to help Nigeria generate the revenues it so desperately needs to build more schools, more universities, and, of course, more infrastructure.  So, there is a comprehensive set of reforms that Nigeria can pursue that would help engender more growth and help diversify the economy away from reliance on oil.  And this diversification is, of course, all the more important given what we are seeing happening to commodity prices.  So, I think this is an important agenda. 

    Second, as the government is doing this, of course there will be a financing need.  And here what is needed is really a judicious and agile way of dealing with the financing challenges the country faces.  In the long run, the financing gap can only be filled by permanent sources such as revenue mobilization.  But in the interim, carefully looking at all the options the country must borrow in a contained way will be part of that solution.  And I think the government has been going about this prudently and cautiously so far, and we are encouraged by that. 

    And lastly, on data issues in Nigeria we really applaud the effort the government’s making to try and revise and upgrade data quality in Nigeria.  This task is not an easy one in our countries, given the extent of informality there is, given the extent of relative price changes that play out in our economies.  So doing this cautiously is what is needed methodically.  And that is exactly what we see happening.  We welcome, though, the efforts the government is making because without good data, it is difficult to make good policies.  So, we really applaud the effort the government is making to try and upgrade data quality. 

    MR. AKUAMOAH-BOATENG: We will take a round of questions online.

    QUESTIONER: There are bills in the UK Parliament and the New York State Assembly that aim to force holdout private creditors to accept debt treatments on comparable terms to other creditors and to limit or stop such litigation.  Are these bills needed, do you think, or is the current international debt architecture sufficient?  So, you know, IMF, DSAs, creditor groups, the common framework, where applicable. 

    MR. AKUAMOAH-BOATENG: Please go ahead with your question.

    QUESTIONER: Earlier this month, the IMF reached a staff-level agreement with Burkina Faso to complete the Third Review of the country’s program.  So as part of the review, the IMF allowed a greater fiscal flexibility, allowing Burkina Faso to raise its public deficit target to 4 percent, up from the 2 percent cap set by the West African Economic Monetary Union.  So, given that the country’s challenges, such as persistent insecurity, high social demands, are common across the region, wouldn’t it be wiser to consider applying this flexibility more broadly to the West African Economic Monetary Union?  And my second question will be about the downward revision of the growth forecast for 2025 and 2026 in Sub-Saharan Africa.  Does the IMF view this new crisis – I am talking about the global uncertainty and the recent U.S. tariff measures.  Does the IMF view this crisis as potentially more severe and with broader consequences for the region than previous shocks such as COVID and the war in Ukraine? 

    MR. SELASSIE: On the first question on debt workouts and the challenges there, I am not fully informed about the specifics of the bills that Rachel, you are talking about, indeed, we have seen from time to time some private creditor groups holding out, trying to hold out, but I am not sure that a bill is what’s needed, but rather, force of argument to try and bring people to the table. And in recent restructurings, at least I am not aware of this being the main hindrance in advancing discussions.  There have been many other factors, including just the complexity of the current creditor landscape, that have played a role. 

    On Burkina Faso, flexibility under the program or the deficit targets for the WAEMU countries more generally, just it is important to distinguish between particular years’ fiscal deficit targets that the government wants to pursue and we, incorporate in the program and just the more medium-term criteria, convergence criteria that there is for the WAEMU countries. 

    So, the 3 percent target criteria are for the medium- to long-term.  And it has been very clear that when there are shocks or when there are pressing social development needs, countries do have the scope to deviate from that.  In fact, often the constraint on the Sahel countries has been not having enough, sufficient, enough financing to be able to meet these to advance development objectives.  The other constraint of course is that overall, the more you exceed this 3 percent target and add to the overall debt burden, the more you are going to have – you are likely to build up debt vulnerabilities. 

    So, in the work that we do with countries, whether it is Burkina Faso or other WAEMU countries or indeed beyond, what we try and help with is of course to help countries strike this balance between addressing the immediate and pressing needs that they have while avoiding medium-term debt sustainability problems.  I think one is just thinking about how to strike this balance.  And then second, we put resources on the table very cheaply to help countries, avoid, at least in the near term, more difficult financing difficulties.  So, for Burkina and others, it is just about striking this balance.

    And on growth, whether this latest shock is as bad for the region as the previous ones. I think it is really important also to point out that as difficult, I mean the last four or five years have been incredibly difficult time for our countries, a lot of challenges, a lot of dislocation, but there is also been quite a lot of resilience, and I think that is important to stress.  I would note that, even now, it is this year, 11 out of the 20 fastest growing economies in the world are from Sub-Saharan Africa.  So, there are quite a lot of countries that are going to be sustaining significant growth in the region.  So, we should also not lose sight of this resilience. 

    Second, and more broadly, the buildup of uncertainties I think is very negative.  And this is interrupting what we are seeing in terms of a recovery.  But growth is not, we are not projecting growth to collapse.  And our hope is that as things calm down, the region can resume its growth trajectory also.

    MR. AKUAMOAH-BOATENG: We will take three more questions online, then we will come back to the room.

    QUESTIONER: I wanted to know about Senegal, in terms of whether funds would be repaid after the misreporting of data and if the IMF has learned anything from that?  And also, just if you can, the status of the IMF’s programs and even operations in Sudan and South Sudan? 

    MR. AKUAMOAH-BOATENG: Please go ahead.

    QUESTIONER: The IMF is urging countries to focus on domestic revenue mobilization.  But you may have seen that South Africa’s Finance Minister has withdrawn the VAT increase that he had proposed in the budget, in the face of opposition from coalition partners.  Does the IMF see any alternative sources of revenue that are feasible for the South African government as the parties hoped?  And are there any lessons here for other countries trying to mobilize domestic revenue?                                                         

    QUESTIONER: Building on the question that Hilary has asked that the REO does make the case for domestic revenue mobilization, and you made that argument, I believe, in the last two Regional Economic Outlook reports as well.  But poverty is still endemic.  Incomes, as far as I can tell, have not really recovered to pre-pandemic levels.  So other than broadcast to tax exemptions what else can be done to raise tax-to-GDP ratios?  One last question on this.  Has there been any progress that has been made in the Sovereign Debt Roundtable in deciding how debt from Afreximbank, and Trade and Development Bank should be treated, at least under the common framework for countries like Ghana and Zambia?  Now, do they qualify to not have their debt restructured in the same way that the IMF, the World Bank’s credit lines?

    MR. SELASSIE: On Senegal, I was recently in Dakar for discussions building on work that our team has been doing. What we are waiting for is the government to finalize the work that’s ongoing.  Right now, the audits are going on and reconciliation work is going on. 

    On the extent of domestic and external debt.  We have been very clear in welcoming the transparency and really robust and collegial way in which the government has been engaging on the issues that have arisen in the misreporting case and we look forward to the numbers stabilizing, and engaging in discussions on the next steps in terms of bringing the, the findings to our Executive Board and next steps in our engagement with Senegal. 

    On South Sudan, it has just been a difficult period of course for South Sudan.  They have been hosting hundreds of thousands of refugees fleeing from the conflict in the north.  The conflict has also interrupted, disrupted heavily their main source of tax revenue, oil exports through the pipeline.  So, it’s been a really wrenching period.  Over the last three, four years we have provided, you know, we have been trying to provide South Sudan with emergency financing and trying to find a way in which we can engage with a more structured longer-term program.  We remain hopeful that we are going to be able to do that.  But first and foremost, I think we need to see what can be done to make sure that the policy making environment is as robust and as strong as it is, and as transparent, so we can come in, step in and support South Sudan.

    On revenue mobilization, I want to just first link this to the point I made earlier that what we have observed and again there is a risk of generalizing, but what we’ve observed over the last 10, 15 years in the region is that governments have made a very significant effort to invest in really important infrastructure needs in building schools, in building health clinics and much else.  And you see very positive outcomes.  Look at the electricity coverage in our region, look at the human development indicators and how much they have moved over the years in the region. 

    But we have also seen that despite a lot of investment, for example, in electricity generation capacity and electricity coverage in our countries, many roads are being built.  The returns of all this investment have not been captured in the tax revenue, which is one of the points, the pressure points where debt levels have gone up and the interest-to-revenue ratio.  So, the interest payment-to-revenue ratio has also been rising.  And this has been one of the key points of vulnerability in many economies and why a few countries have gotten into debt difficulty and needed to restructure. 

    So going forward, I think it’s very clear that to be able to continue investing; to be able to continue expanding economies and the government doing its core function, it has to find more ways other than borrowing to address this. 

    Now, in the past, governments have been quick to cut spending, and that has, we found, again and again, to be very detrimental to development progress and growth outcomes.  I think this, again, at the risk of generalizing, was the approach that was generally pursued in the 1980s and found to be very problematic, very challenging, very depressing to growth.  So, we would very much love for countries to avoid this. When there are pressing spending needs, there’s generally only a couple of ways that you can finance this.  Spending cuts or revenue mobilization.  You can borrow, of course, but as I said, borrowing is not optimal. 

    Now, this doesn’t mean revenue mobilization is easy.  Far, far from it. It requires not only political engagement, but also a lot of communication, a lot of effort to show that the resources the government is trying to generate are going to be going to the right areas to help strengthen the social contract.  So, it’s a deep and engaged process, and we are very, very cognizant of that.  But I do think that this is the most optimal way, the most economically sensible way in which our countries can help address the tremendous development needs that we have.

    Now, specifically on South Africa, ultimately when issues like this arise, these are deeply domestic political issues to be resolved as to what the best way to do the financing is.  So, if a tax rate increase for a particular tax is not possible, then maybe finding ways to expand the tax base, maybe trying different tax angles or if all of those are not possible, then revisiting spending priorities may be one of the ways that countries must handle this.  And this is typically what we see playing out in countries in the region when financing constraints are binding. 

    So, whether it is in Kenya, South Africa, or other countries the issue of revenue mobilization is a live one, but one that is extremely complex.  We are very cognizant of that.  And one that requires quite a lot of consensus building, quite a lot of discussion to be able to advance, and of course, broader societal support.  And we absolutely see countries engaging in this and do what we can to help bring lessons from other countries where we are asked to.

    Then there was a question about the GSDR.  So, this Global Sovereign Debt Roundtable, this is the initiative launched by the Fund and the Bank to try and bring creditors and debtors together around the table to find ways in which debt work[outs] can be easier because you are discussing general principles rather than country-specific debt restructuring issues. And we have seen this making quite a lot of progress. Perhaps the most recent development has been the preparation of a debt work[out] playbook that is a very helpful document that has been put out building on the experience of recent work[outs].  What has worked particularly well.  What kind of information sharing ahead of debt work[outs] have been helpful in terms of accelerating debt processes.  Debt restructurings are one of the most contentious and challenging issues that there are between states, between creditors and debtors, and it requires quite a lot of discussion, and it is not such an easy thing to do, including what the parameter of debt should be.  I think one of the questions that was raised is about the debt parameter.  This is fundamentally an issue for the debtor countries and creditors to resolve, and intra-creditor disputes also have to be done. 

    So, in terms of the principles that generally we see creditors apply when these kinds of disputes arise about what the right parameter should be or not and who gets preferential treatment. I think there’s generally been two rules of thumb. One is that the terms in which new financing is being provided or the financing is provided, whether it’s commercial or concessional has been a factor that most creditors look at in terms of whether a particular credit should be included in the parameter or not, and then also the extent to which new financing is being made available.  So, what differentiates senior creditors like the IMF, the World Bank, of course, is that for most countries we operate providing concessional financing very long-term.  And we are the ones that come in and provide financing consistently through crisis and otherwise. 

    MR. AKUAMOAH-BOATENG: We have time for one more round of questions. I will start with the gentleman in the front here. 

    QUESTIONER: The U.S. is your largest shareholder, and we are seeing mixed messages this week from the Treasury Secretary mentioning that he remains committed to the Fund but also calling on you to hold countries accountable to program performance, empower staff to walk away if reform commitment is lacking. 

    So, I wanted to ask you, should we expect the IMF spigot to start closing in response to U.S. pressure?  Or if not, are you changing your approach to countries, what you are telling them and how to deal with their issues?  Are you being a little more stringent in your requirements? 

    You have talked about Senegal, maybe Ghana, Ethiopia, related to that issue of the U.S stepping in.  The CEMAC negotiations this week, we saw American energy companies working with the CEMAC on repatriation of funds dedicated to the rehabilitation of oil sites.  I’m wondering if you have a stance on that, what the IMF position is?  I understand the U.S is trying to get the IMF involved in that.

    MR. AKUAMOAH-BOATENG: All right, thanks. Gentleman. 

    QUESTIONER: Kenyan authorities here have indicated the need to present a credible fiscal framework as they try and unlock a new program for Kenya.  Would you offer more color into the discussions this week, noting again that the same credibility questions led to the cancellation or the termination of the program at its final review?  

    MR. AKUAMOAH-BOATENG: We have a question online “what is the IMF’s view on Kenya’s debt position?”

    MR. SELASSIE: So, on the first question, I would like to refer you to Kristalina who gave comprehensive responses to the Secretary’s IMFC Statement. What I want to add though is that in the region, in Sub-Saharan Africa, in terms of programs, the calibration of reforms, incorporation of reforms, I would say that we are always in terms of each program has its particularities and what we always try and do in these programs is make sure that we’re striking a balance of helping countries address the long term challenges and also the cyclical challenges that are often the ones that cause them to come to us.  And I would say that I don’t think there are many countries that think that the adjustment efforts that they’re being asked to make are easy ones.

    On CEMAC.  Just to be very clear there is this dispute that is going on between member states, the BEAC, and oil companies with respect to what are called restitution funds.  The funds under contracts that countries have with oil companies are meant to be available to help restore the sites where oil is extracted back to their pre-extraction standards. 

    What has been a bit frustrating is that we are not privy to the contents of these documents. We have been calling on members and the companies involved to be transparent about this, to publish these documents.  They are after all documents that are about how countries natural resource wealth are used.  And we’ve been on record going seven, eight, nine years pushing for production sharing agreements, the terms of these things to be published so that each side can hold the other accountable.  I think that is the first thing that could be done to bring more transparency and light and understanding to the rest of the world about what is going on in these discussions. 

    Second, we have also made it clear to both parties that given that we do not have full information, it is difficult for us to know what to say.  But in general, any encumbrances in terms of how we look at foreign exchange reserves and these standards are published, any encumbrances like the type that we think there may be in the document, i.e., that is the expectation that these resources will be used for specific purposes means they’re not general use reserves.  So, they would not be classified as part of reserves. 

    On Kenya, we have had a very strong engagement with Kenya over the years and will continue to have such engagement going forward.  As we have noted, government has asked for a follow-on program to try and address the remaining challenges in Kenya, and we are discussing how to do that including in the context of these meetings. 

    It has been good to hear and see that the economy has been performing quite well in some parts.  Particularly the external adjustment front seems to have been proceeding well.  The current account has been narrowing.  So, there are quite a lot of strengths.  But also of course there remain fiscal challenges which were a significant part of the last program’s objectives that need to be advanced.  So, we are going to engage with the government and do everything that we can to be able to help it go forward. 

    MR. AKUAMOAH-BOATENG: Unfortunately, that is all the time we have. So, if you have any questions that we didn’t get to, please send them to me or to Media at IMF.org and we will try and get back to you as soon as possible.  So, also to mention that the report is now available at IMF.org/Africa.  The Spring Meetings continue.  Later this morning, we have the press briefing for the European Department and later in the afternoon we have the IMFC, and the Western Hemisphere Department press briefings. 

    On behalf of Abebe and the African and Communications Departments, thank you all for coming to this press briefing and see you next time. 

    IMF Communications Department
    MEDIA RELATIONS

    PRESS OFFICER: Kwabena Akuamoah-Boateng

    Phone: +1 202 623-7100Email: MEDIA@IMF.org

    https://www.imf.org/en/News/Articles/2025/04/25/tr-04252025-african-department-press-briefing-transcript

    MIL OSI

    MIL OSI Russia News

  • MIL-OSI: Park National Corporation reports financial results for first quarter 2025

    Source: GlobeNewswire (MIL-OSI)

    NEWARK, Ohio, April 25, 2025 (GLOBE NEWSWIRE) — Park National Corporation (Park) (NYSE American: PRK) today reported financial results for the first quarter of 2025. Park’s board of directors declared a quarterly cash dividend of $1.07 per common share, payable on June 10, 2025, to common shareholders of record as of May 16, 2025.

    “Our first quarter performance reflects our commitment to providing consistent financial support and a measure of predictability in dynamic market conditions,” said Park Chairman and CEO David Trautman. “In a world buffeted by extremes, our greatest opportunity to serve more is through continuing to build authentic relationships and showing up as a steady, reliable partner.”

    Park’s net income for the first quarter of 2025 was $42.2 million, a 19.8 percent increase from $35.2 million for the first quarter of 2024. First quarter 2025 net income per diluted common share was $2.60, compared to $2.17 for the first quarter of 2024. Park’s total loans increased 0.9 percent (3.5 percent annualized) during the first quarter of 2025. Park’s reported period end deposits increased 0.7 percent (2.9 percent annualized) during the first quarter of 2025, with an increase of 2.3 percent (9.5 percent annualized), including deposits that Park moved off balance sheet as of March 31, 2025. The combination of solid loan growth and steady deposits continue to contribute to Park’s success in 2025.

    “Our bankers’ ability to serve others well is reflected in our first quarter results,” said Park President Matthew Miller. “We’re deeply grateful for the trust our communities, customers and neighbors place in us every day. We look forward to growing these and new relationships, consistently delivering on our promises and expanding our impact.”

    Headquartered in Newark, Ohio, Park National Corporation has $9.9 billion in total assets (as of March 31, 2025). Park’s banking operations are conducted through its subsidiary, The Park National Bank. Other Park subsidiaries are Scope Leasing, Inc. (d.b.a. Scope Aircraft Finance), Guardian Financial Services Company (d.b.a. Guardian Finance Company), Park Investments, Inc. and SE Property Holdings, LLC.

    Complete financial tables are listed below.

    Category: Earnings

    SAFE HARBOR STATEMENT UNDER THE PRIVATE SECURITIES LITIGATION REFORM ACT OF 1995

    Park cautions that any forward-looking statements contained in this news release or made by management of Park are provided to assist in the understanding of anticipated future financial performance. Forward-looking statements provide current expectations or forecasts of future events and are not guarantees of future performance. The forward-looking statements are based on management’s expectations and are subject to a number of risks and uncertainties, including those described in Park’s Annual Report on Form 10-K for the fiscal year ended December 31, 2024, as updated by our filings with the SEC. Although management believes that the expectations reflected in such forward-looking statements are reasonable, actual results may differ materially from those expressed or implied in such statements.

    Risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ include, without limitation: (1) the ability to execute our business plan successfully and manage strategic initiatives; (2) the impact of current and future economic and financial market conditions, including unemployment rates, inflation, interest rates, supply-demand imbalances, and geopolitical matters; (3) factors impacting the performance of our loan portfolio, including real estate values, financial health of borrowers, and loan concentrations; (4) the effects of monetary and fiscal policies, including interest rates, money supply, and inflation; (5) changes in federal, state, or local tax laws; (6) the impact of changes in governmental policy and regulatory requirements on our operations; (7) changes in consumer spending, borrowing, and saving habits; (8) changes in the performance and creditworthiness of customers, suppliers, and counterparties; (9) increased credit risk and higher credit losses due to loan concentrations; (10) volatility in mortgage banking income due to interest rates and demand; (11) adequacy of our internal controls and risk management programs; (12) competitive pressures among financial services organizations; (13) uncertainty regarding changes in banking regulations and other regulatory requirements; (14) our ability to meet heightened supervisory requirements and expectations; (15) the impact of changes in accounting policies and practices on our financial condition; (16) the reliability and accuracy of assumptions and estimates used in applying critical accounting estimates; (17) the potential for higher future credit losses due to changes in economic assumptions; (18) the ability to anticipate and respond to technological changes and our reliance on third-party vendors; (19) operational issues related to and capital spending necessitated by the implementation of information technology systems on which we are highly dependent; (20) the ability to secure confidential information and deliver products and services through computer systems and telecommunications networks; (21) the impact of security breaches or failures in operational systems; (22) the impact of geopolitical instability and trade policies on our operations including the imposition of tariffs and retaliatory tariffs; (23) the impact of changes in credit ratings of government debt and financial stability of sovereign governments; (24) the effect of stock market price fluctuations on our asset and wealth management businesses; (25) litigation and regulatory compliance exposure; (26) availability of earnings and excess capital for dividend declarations; (27) the impact of fraud, scams, and schemes on our business; (28) the impact of natural disasters, pandemics, and other emergencies on our operations; (29) potential deterioration of the economy due to financial, political, or other shocks; (30) impact of healthcare laws and potential changes on our costs and operations; (31) the ability to grow deposits and maintain adequate deposit levels, including by mitigating the effect of unexpected deposit outflows on our financial condition; and (32) other risk factors related to the banking industry.

    Park does not undertake, and specifically disclaims any obligation, to publicly release the results of any revisions that may be made to update any forward-looking statement to reflect the events or circumstances after the date on which the forward-looking statement was made, or reflect the occurrence of unanticipated events, except to the extent required by law.

    PARK NATIONAL CORPORATION  
    Financial Highlights  
    As of or for the three months ended March 31, 2025, December 31, 2024 and March 31, 2024              
                     
        2025       2024       2024       Percent change vs.  
    (in thousands, except common share and per common share data and ratios) 1st QTR 4th QTR 1st QTR   4Q ’24   1Q ’24  
    INCOME STATEMENT:                
    Net interest income $ 104,377     $ 103,445     $ 95,623       0.9   % 9.2   %
    Provision for credit losses   756       3,935       2,180       (80.8 ) % (65.3 ) %
    Other income   25,746       31,064       26,200       (17.1 ) % (1.7 ) %
    Other expense   78,164       83,241       77,228       (6.1 ) % 1.2   %
    Income before income taxes $ 51,203     $ 47,333     $ 42,415       8.2   % 20.7   %
    Income taxes   9,046       8,703       7,211       3.9   % 25.4   %
    Net income $ 42,157     $ 38,630     $ 35,204       9.1   % 19.8   %
                     
    MARKET DATA:                
    Earnings per common share – basic (a) $ 2.61     $ 2.39     $ 2.18       9.2   % 19.7   %
    Earnings per common share – diluted (a)   2.60       2.37       2.17       9.7   % 19.8   %
    Quarterly cash dividend declared per common share   1.07       1.06       1.06       0.9   % 0.9   %
    Special cash dividend declared per common share         0.50             N.M.   N.M.  
    Book value per common share at period end   79.00       76.98       71.95       2.6   % 9.8   %
    Market price per common share at period end   151.40       171.43       135.85       (11.7 ) % 11.4   %
    Market capitalization at period end   2,451,370       2,770,134       2,199,556       (11.5 ) % 11.4   %
                     
    Weighted average common shares – basic (b)   16,159,342       16,156,827       16,116,842         % 0.3   %
    Weighted average common shares – diluted (b)   16,238,701       16,283,701       16,191,065       (0.3 ) % 0.3   %
    Common shares outstanding at period end   16,191,347       16,158,982       16,149,523       0.2   % 0.3   %
                     
    PERFORMANCE RATIOS: (annualized)                
    Return on average assets (a)(b)   1.70   %   1.54   %   1.44   %   10.4   % 18.1   %
    Return on average shareholders’ equity (a)(b)   13.46   %   12.32   %   12.23   %   9.3   % 10.1   %
    Yield on loans   6.26   %   6.21   %   5.99   %   0.8   % 4.5   %
    Yield on investment securities   3.25   %   3.46   %   3.90   %   (6.1 ) % (16.7 ) %
    Yield on money market instruments   4.46   %   4.75   %   5.48   %   (6.1 ) % (18.6 ) %
    Yield on interest earning assets   5.85   %   5.82   %   5.66   %   0.5   % 3.4   %
    Cost of interest bearing deposits   1.76   %   1.90   %   1.94   %   (7.4 ) % (9.3 ) %
    Cost of borrowings   3.94   %   3.86   %   4.25   %   2.1   % (7.3 ) %
    Cost of paying interest bearing liabilities   1.86   %   1.99   %   2.08   %   (6.5 ) % (10.6 ) %
    Net interest margin (g)   4.62   %   4.51   %   4.28   %   2.4   % 7.9   %
    Efficiency ratio (g)   59.79   %   61.60   %   63.07   %   (2.9 ) % (5.2 ) %
                     
    OTHER DATA (NON-GAAP) AND BALANCE SHEET INFORMATION:                
    Tangible book value per common share (d) $ 68.94     $ 66.89     $ 61.80       3.1   % 11.6   %
    Average interest earning assets   9,210,385       9,176,540       9,048,204       0.4   % 1.8   %
    Pre-tax, pre-provision net income (j)   51,959       51,268       44,595       1.3   % 16.5   %
                     
    Note: Explanations for footnotes (a) – (k) are included at the end of the financial tables in the “Financial Reconciliations” section.  
       
    PARK NATIONAL CORPORATION  
    Financial Highlights (continued)  
    As of or for the three months ended March 31, 2025, December 31, 2024 and March 31, 2024  
                     
              Percent change vs.  
    (in thousands, except ratios) March 31, 2025 December 31, 2024 March 31, 2024   4Q ’24   1Q ’24  
    BALANCE SHEET:                
    Investment securities $ 1,042,163     $ 1,100,861     $ 1,339,747       (5.3 ) % (22.2 ) %
    Loans   7,883,735       7,817,128       7,525,005       0.9   % 4.8   %
    Allowance for credit losses   88,130       87,966       85,084       0.2   % 3.6   %
    Goodwill and other intangible assets   162,758       163,032       163,927       (0.2 ) % (0.7 ) %
    Other real estate owned (OREO)   119       938       1,674       (87.3 ) % (92.9 ) %
    Total assets   9,886,612       9,805,350       9,881,077       0.8   % 0.1   %
    Total deposits   8,201,695       8,143,526       8,306,032       0.7   % (1.3 ) %
    Borrowings   270,757       280,083       295,130       (3.3 ) % (8.3 ) %
    Total shareholders’ equity   1,279,042       1,243,848       1,161,979       2.8   % 10.1   %
    Tangible equity (d)   1,116,284       1,080,816       998,052       3.3   % 11.8   %
    Total nonperforming loans   63,148       69,932       71,759       (9.7 ) % (12.0 ) %
    Total nonperforming assets   63,267       70,870       73,433       (10.7 ) % (13.8 ) %
                     
    ASSET QUALITY RATIOS:                
    Loans as a % of period end total assets   79.74   %   79.72   %   76.16   %     % 4.7   %
    Total nonperforming loans as a % of period end loans   0.80   %   0.89   %   0.95   %   (10.1 ) % (15.8 ) %
    Total nonperforming assets as a % of period end loans + OREO + other nonperforming assets   0.80   %   0.91   %   0.98   %   (12.1 ) % (18.4 ) %
    Allowance for credit losses as a % of period end loans   1.12   %   1.13   %   1.13   %   (0.9 ) % (0.9 ) %
    Net loan charge-offs $ 592     $ 3,206     $ 841       (81.5 ) % (29.6 ) %
    Annualized net loan charge-offs as a % of average loans (b)   0.03   %   0.16   %   0.05   %   (81.3 ) % (40.0 ) %
                     
    CAPITAL & LIQUIDITY:                
    Total shareholders’ equity / Period end total assets   12.94   %   12.69   %   11.76   %   2.0   % 10.0   %
    Tangible equity (d) / Tangible assets (f)   11.48   %   11.21   %   10.27   %   2.4   % 11.8   %
    Average shareholders’ equity / Average assets (b)   12.64   %   12.47   %   11.74   %   1.4   % 7.7   %
    Average shareholders’ equity / Average loans (b)   16.22   %   16.08   %   15.48   %   0.9   % 4.8   %
    Average loans / Average deposits (b)   93.56   %   93.00   %   91.11   %   0.6   % 2.7   %
                     
    Note: Explanations for footnotes (a) – (k) are included at the end of the financial tables in the “Financial Reconciliations” section.  
       
    PARK NATIONAL CORPORATION
    Consolidated Statements of Income
               
        Three Months Ended  
        March 31  
    (in thousands, except share and per share data)   2025   2024  
               
    Interest income:          
    Interest and fees on loans   $ 120,648   $ 111,211  
    Interest on debt securities:          
    Taxable     7,130     11,899  
    Tax-exempt     1,269     1,410  
    Other interest income     3,153     2,120  
    Total interest income     132,200     126,640  
               
    Interest expense:          
    Interest on deposits:          
    Demand and savings deposits     18,436     19,855  
    Time deposits     6,770     7,338  
    Interest on borrowings     2,617     3,824  
    Total interest expense     27,823     31,017  
               
    Net interest income     104,377     95,623  
               
    Provision for credit losses     756     2,180  
               
    Net interest income after provision for credit losses     103,621     93,443  
               
    Other income     25,746     26,200  
               
    Other expense     78,164     77,228  
               
    Income before income taxes     51,203     42,415  
               
    Income taxes     9,046     7,211  
               
    Net income   $ 42,157   $ 35,204  
               
    Per common share:          
    Net income – basic   $ 2.61   $ 2.18  
    Net income – diluted   $ 2.60   $ 2.17  
               
    Weighted average common shares – basic     16,159,342     16,116,842  
    Weighted average common shares – diluted     16,238,701     16,191,065  
               
    Cash dividends declared:          
      Quarterly dividend   $ 1.07   $ 1.06  
     
    PARK NATIONAL CORPORATION
    Consolidated Balance Sheets
         
    (in thousands, except share data) March 31, 2025 December 31, 2024
         
    Assets    
         
    Cash and due from banks $ 154,536   $ 122,363  
    Money market instruments   83,078     38,203  
    Investment securities   1,042,163     1,100,861  
    Loans   7,883,735     7,817,128  
    Allowance for credit losses   (88,130 )   (87,966 )
    Loans, net   7,795,605     7,729,162  
    Bank premises and equipment, net   66,327     69,522  
    Goodwill and other intangible assets   162,758     163,032  
    Other real estate owned   119     938  
    Other assets   582,026     581,269  
    Total assets $ 9,886,612   $ 9,805,350  
         
    Liabilities and Shareholders’ Equity    
         
    Deposits:    
    Noninterest bearing $ 2,637,577   $ 2,612,708  
    Interest bearing   5,564,118     5,530,818  
    Total deposits   8,201,695     8,143,526  
    Borrowings   270,757     280,083  
    Other liabilities   135,118     137,893  
    Total liabilities $ 8,607,570   $ 8,561,502  
         
         
    Shareholders’ Equity:    
    Preferred shares (200,000 shares authorized; no shares outstanding at March 31, 2025 and December 31, 2024) $   $  
    Common shares (No par value; 20,000,000 shares authorized; 17,623,104 shares issued at March 31, 2025 and December 31, 2024)   459,529     463,706  
    Accumulated other comprehensive loss, net of taxes   (34,659 )   (46,175 )
    Retained earnings   1,002,110     977,599  
    Treasury shares (1,431,757 shares at March 31, 2025 and 1,464,122 shares at December 31, 2024)   (147,938 )   (151,282 )
    Total shareholders’ equity $ 1,279,042   $ 1,243,848  
    Total liabilities and shareholders’ equity $ 9,886,612   $ 9,805,350  
     
    PARK NATIONAL CORPORATION
    Consolidated Average Balance Sheets
           
      Three Months Ended  
      March 31  
    (in thousands)   2025     2024    
           
    Assets      
           
    Cash and due from banks $ 127,229   $ 143,714    
    Money market instruments   287,016     155,511    
    Investment securities   1,069,620     1,368,527    
    Loans   7,833,234     7,482,650    
    Allowance for credit losses   (88,825 )   (84,067 )  
    Loans, net   7,744,409     7,398,583    
    Bank premises and equipment, net   68,992     74,919    
    Goodwill and other intangible assets   162,938     164,137    
    Other real estate owned   918     1,088    
    Other assets   584,485     556,899    
    Total assets $ 10,045,607   $ 9,863,378    
           
           
    Liabilities and Shareholders’ Equity      
           
    Deposits:      
    Noninterest bearing $ 2,578,838   $ 2,569,030    
    Interest bearing   5,793,915     5,644,088    
    Total deposits   8,372,753     8,213,118    
    Borrowings   269,254     361,703    
    Other liabilities   133,341     130,373    
    Total liabilities $ 8,775,348   $ 8,705,194    
           
    Shareholders’ Equity:      
    Preferred shares $   $    
    Common shares   464,046     463,518    
    Accumulated other comprehensive loss, net of taxes   (39,942 )   (67,343 )  
    Retained earnings   997,399     917,645    
    Treasury shares   (151,244 )   (155,636 )  
    Total shareholders’ equity $ 1,270,259   $ 1,158,184    
    Total liabilities and shareholders’ equity $ 10,045,607   $ 9,863,378    
     
    PARK NATIONAL CORPORATION
    Consolidated Statements of Income – Linked Quarters
               
      2025 2024 2024 2024 2024
    (in thousands, except per share data) 1st QTR 4th QTR 3rd QTR 2nd QTR 1st QTR
               
    Interest income:          
    Interest and fees on loans $ 120,648   $ 120,870   $ 120,203   $ 115,318   $ 111,211  
    Interest on debt securities:          
    Taxable   7,130     8,641     10,228     10,950     11,899  
    Tax-exempt   1,269     1,351     1,381     1,382     1,410  
    Other interest income   3,153     2,751     1,996     1,254     2,120  
    Total interest income   132,200     133,613     133,808     128,904     126,640  
               
    Interest expense:          
    Interest on deposits:          
    Demand and savings deposits   18,436     19,802     22,762     20,370     19,855  
    Time deposits   6,770     7,658     7,073     7,525     7,338  
    Interest on borrowings   2,617     2,708     2,859     3,172     3,824  
    Total interest expense   27,823     30,168     32,694     31,067     31,017  
               
    Net interest income   104,377     103,445     101,114     97,837     95,623  
               
    Provision for credit losses   756     3,935     5,315     3,113     2,180  
               
    Net interest income after provision for credit losses   103,621     99,510     95,799     94,724     93,443  
               
    Other income   25,746     31,064     36,530     28,794     26,200  
               
    Other expense   78,164     83,241     85,681     75,189     77,228  
               
    Income before income taxes   51,203     47,333     46,648     48,329     42,415  
               
    Income taxes   9,046     8,703     8,431     8,960     7,211  
               
    Net income $ 42,157   $ 38,630   $ 38,217   $ 39,369   $ 35,204  
               
    Per common share:          
    Net income – basic $ 2.61   $ 2.39   $ 2.37   $ 2.44   $ 2.18  
    Net income – diluted $ 2.60   $ 2.37   $ 2.35   $ 2.42   $ 2.17  
     
    PARK NATIONAL CORPORATION
    Detail of other income and other expense – Linked Quarters
               
        2025     2024     2024     2024     2024  
    (in thousands) 1st QTR 4th QTR 3rd QTR 2nd QTR 1st QTR
               
    Other income:          
    Income from fiduciary activities $ 10,994   $ 11,122   $ 10,615   $ 10,728   $ 10,024  
    Service charges on deposit accounts   2,407     2,319     2,362     2,214     2,106  
    Other service income   2,936     3,277     3,036     2,906     2,524  
    Debit card fee income   6,089     6,511     6,539     6,580     6,243  
    Bank owned life insurance income   1,512     1,519     2,057     1,565     2,629  
    ATM fees   335     415     471     458     496  
    Pension settlement gain       365     5,783          
    (Loss) gain on the sale of OREO, net   (229 )   (74 )   2     (7 )   121  
    Loss on sale of debt securities, net       (128 )           (398 )
    (Loss) gain on equity securities, net   (862 )   1,852     1,557     358     (687 )
    Other components of net periodic benefit income   2,344     2,651     2,204     2,204     2,204  
    Miscellaneous   220     1,235     1,904     1,788     938  
    Total other income $ 25,746   $ 31,064   $ 36,530   $ 28,794   $ 26,200  
               
    Other expense:          
    Salaries $ 36,216   $ 37,254   $ 38,370   $ 35,954   $ 35,733  
    Employee benefits   10,516     10,129     10,162     9,873     11,560  
    Occupancy expense   3,519     2,929     3,731     2,975     3,181  
    Furniture and equipment expense   2,301     2,375     2,571     2,454     2,583  
    Data processing fees   10,529     10,450     11,764     9,542     8,808  
    Professional fees and services   7,307     10,465     7,842     6,022     6,817  
    Marketing   1,528     1,949     1,464     1,164     1,741  
    Insurance   1,686     1,600     1,640     1,777     1,718  
    Communication   1,202     1,104     955     1,002     1,036  
    State tax expense   1,186     1,145     1,116     1,129     1,110  
    Amortization of intangible assets   274     288     287     320     320  
    Foundation contributions           2,000          
    Miscellaneous   1,900     3,553     3,779     2,977     2,621  
    Total other expense $ 78,164   $ 83,241   $ 85,681   $ 75,189   $ 77,228  
               
    PARK NATIONAL CORPORATION
    Asset Quality Information
                   
          Year ended December 31,
    (in thousands, except ratios)   March 31, 2025   2024     2023     2022     2021     2020  
                   
    Allowance for credit losses:              
    Allowance for credit losses, beginning of period   $ 87,966   $ 83,745   $ 85,379   $ 83,197   $ 85,675   $ 56,679  
    Cumulative change in accounting principle; adoption of ASU 2022-02 in 2023 and ASU 2016-13 in 2021           383         6,090      
    Charge-offs     3,605     18,334     10,863     9,133     5,093     10,304  
    Recoveries     3,013     8,012     5,942     6,758     8,441     27,246  
    Net charge-offs (recoveries)     592     10,322     4,921     2,375     (3,348 )   (16,942 )
    Provision for (recovery of) credit losses     756     14,543     2,904     4,557     (11,916 )   12,054  
    Allowance for credit losses, end of period   $ 88,130   $ 87,966   $ 83,745   $ 85,379   $ 83,197   $ 85,675  
                   
    General reserve trends:              
    Allowance for credit losses, end of period   $ 88,130   $ 87,966   $ 83,745   $ 85,379   $ 83,197   $ 85,675  
    Allowance on accruing purchased credit deteriorated (“PCD”) loans (purchased credit impaired (“PCI”) loans for years 2020 and prior)                         167  
    Allowance on purchased loans excluded from collectively evaluated loans (for years 2020 and prior)   N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A.   678  
    Specific reserves on individually evaluated loans – accrual                     42     44  
    Specific reserves on individually evaluated loans – nonaccrual     1,044     1,299     4,983     3,566     1,574     5,390  
    General reserves on collectively evaluated loans   $ 87,086   $ 86,667   $ 78,762   $ 81,813   $ 81,581   $ 79,396  
                   
    Total loans   $ 7,883,735   $ 7,817,128   $ 7,476,221   $ 7,141,891   $ 6,871,122   $ 7,177,785  
    Accruing PCD loans (PCI loans for years 2020 and prior)     2,139     2,174     2,835     4,653     7,149     11,153  
    Purchased loans excluded from collectively evaluated loans (for years 2020 and prior)   N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A.   360,056  
    Individually evaluated loans – accrual (k)     13,935     15,290         11,477     17,517     8,756  
    Individually evaluated loans – nonaccrual     47,718     53,149     45,215     66,864     56,985     99,651  
    Collectively evaluated loans   $ 7,819,943   $ 7,746,515   $ 7,428,171   $ 7,058,897   $ 6,789,471   $ 6,698,169  
                   
    Asset Quality Ratios:              
    Net charge-offs (recoveries) as a % of average loans     0.03 %   0.14 %   0.07 %   0.03 %   (0.05) %   (0.24) %
    Allowance for credit losses as a % of period end loans     1.12 %   1.13 %   1.12 %   1.20 %   1.21 %   1.19 %
    General reserve as a % of collectively evaluated loans     1.11 %   1.12 %   1.06 %   1.16 %   1.20 %   1.19 %
                   
    Nonperforming assets:              
    Nonaccrual loans   $ 61,929   $ 68,178   $ 60,259   $ 79,696   $ 72,722   $ 117,368  
    Accruing troubled debt restructurings (for years 2022 and prior) (k)   N.A. N.A. N.A.   20,134     28,323     20,788  
    Loans past due 90 days or more     1,219     1,754     859     1,281     1,607     1,458  
    Total nonperforming loans   $ 63,148   $ 69,932   $ 61,118   $ 101,111   $ 102,652   $ 139,614  
    Other real estate owned     119     938     983     1,354     775     1,431  
    Other nonperforming assets                     2,750     3,164  
    Total nonperforming assets   $ 63,267   $ 70,870   $ 62,101   $ 102,465   $ 106,177   $ 144,209  
    Percentage of nonaccrual loans to period end loans     0.79 %   0.87 %   0.81 %   1.12 %   1.06 %   1.64 %
    Percentage of nonperforming loans to period end loans     0.80 %   0.89 %   0.82 %   1.42 %   1.49 %   1.95 %
    Percentage of nonperforming assets to period end loans     0.80 %   0.91 %   0.83 %   1.43 %   1.55 %   2.01 %
    Percentage of nonperforming assets to period end total assets     0.64 %   0.72 %   0.63 %   1.04 %   1.11 %   1.55 %
                   
    Note: Explanations for footnotes (a) – (k) are included at the end of the financial tables in the “Financial Reconciliations” section.
     
    PARK NATIONAL CORPORATION
    Asset Quality Information (continued)
                   
          Year ended December 31,
    (in thousands, except ratios)   March 31, 2025 2024 2023 2022 2021 2020
                   
    New nonaccrual loan information:              
    Nonaccrual loans, beginning of period   $ 68,178 $ 60,259 $ 79,696 $ 72,722 $ 117,368 $ 90,080
    New nonaccrual loans     14,767   65,535   48,280   64,918   38,478   103,386
    Resolved nonaccrual loans     21,016   57,616   67,717   57,944   83,124   76,098
    Nonaccrual loans, end of period   $ 61,929 $ 68,178 $ 60,259 $ 79,696 $ 72,722 $ 117,368
                   
    Individually evaluated nonaccrual commercial loan portfolio information (period end):
    Unpaid principal balance   $ 51,134 $ 58,158 $ 47,564 $ 68,639 $ 57,609 $ 100,306
    Prior charge-offs     3,416   5,009   2,349   1,775   624   655
    Remaining principal balance     47,718   53,149   45,215   66,864   56,985   99,651
    Specific reserves     1,044   1,299   4,983   3,566   1,574   5,390
    Book value, after specific reserves   $ 46,674 $ 51,850 $ 40,232 $ 63,298 $ 55,411 $ 94,261
                   
    Note: Explanations for footnotes (a) – (k) are included at the end of the financial tables in the “Financial Reconciliations” section.
     
    PARK NATIONAL CORPORATION  
    Financial Reconciliations        
    NON-GAAP RECONCILIATIONS        
      THREE MONTHS ENDED  
    (in thousands, except share and per share data) March 31, 2025 December 31, 2024 March 31, 2024  
    Net interest income $ 104,377   $ 103,445   $ 95,623    
    less purchase accounting accretion related to NewDominion and Carolina Alliance acquisitions   175     250     352    
    less interest income on former Vision Bank relationships   1,019     38     2    
    Net interest income – adjusted $ 103,183   $ 103,157   $ 95,269    
             
    Provision for credit losses $ 756   $ 3,935   $ 2,180    
    less recoveries on former Vision Bank relationships   (1,097 )       (953 )  
    Provision for credit losses – adjusted $ 1,853   $ 3,935   $ 3,133    
             
    Other income $ 25,746   $ 31,064   $ 26,200    
    less loss on sale of debt securities, net       (128 )   (398 )  
    less pension settlement gain       365        
    less impact of strategic initiatives   (914 )   117     (155 )  
    less Vision related (loss) gain on the sale of OREO, net   (229 )       121    
    less other service income related to former Vision Bank relationships   3     299     7    
    Other income – adjusted $ 26,886   $ 30,411   $ 26,625    
             
    Other expense $ 78,164   $ 83,241   $ 77,228    
    less core deposit intangible amortization related to NewDominion and Carolina Alliance acquisitions   274     288     320    
    less building demolition costs       44     65    
    less direct expenses related to collection of payments on former Vision Bank loan relationships   276     215        
    Other expense – adjusted $ 77,614   $ 82,694   $ 76,843    
             
    Tax effect of adjustments to net income identified above (i) $ (126 ) $ (83 ) $ (104 )  
             
    Net income – reported $ 42,157   $ 38,630   $ 35,204    
    Net income – adjusted (h) $ 41,682   $ 38,319   $ 34,811    
             
    Diluted earnings per common share $ 2.60   $ 2.37   $ 2.17    
    Diluted earnings per common share, adjusted (h) $ 2.57   $ 2.35   $ 2.15    
             
    Annualized return on average assets (a)(b)   1.70 %   1.54 %   1.44 %  
    Annualized return on average assets, adjusted (a)(b)(h)   1.68 %   1.52 %   1.42 %  
             
    Annualized return on average tangible assets (a)(b)(e)   1.73 %   1.56 %   1.46 %  
    Annualized return on average tangible assets, adjusted (a)(b)(e)(h)   1.71 %   1.55 %   1.44 %  
             
    Annualized return on average shareholders’ equity (a)(b)   13.46 %   12.32 %   12.23 %  
    Annualized return on average shareholders’ equity, adjusted (a)(b)(h)   13.31 %   12.22 %   12.09 %  
             
    Annualized return on average tangible equity (a)(b)(c)   15.44 %   14.17 %   14.24 %  
    Annualized return on average tangible equity, adjusted (a)(b)(c)(h)   15.27 %   14.06 %   14.08 %  
             
    Efficiency ratio (g)   59.79 %   61.60 %   63.07 %  
    Efficiency ratio, adjusted (g)(h)   59.39 %   61.63 %   62.72 %  
             
    Annualized net interest margin (g)   4.62 %   4.51 %   4.28 %  
    Annualized net interest margin, adjusted (g)(h)   4.57 %   4.50 %   4.26 %  
    Note: Explanations for footnotes (a) – (k) are included at the end of the financial tables in the “Financial Reconciliations” section.
     
    PARK NATIONAL CORPORATION  
    Financial Reconciliations (continued)        
             
    (a) Reported measure uses net income
    (b) Averages are for the three months ended March 31, 2025, December 31, 2024, and March 31, 2024, as appropriate
    (c) Net income for each period divided by average tangible equity during the period. Average tangible equity equals average shareholders’ equity during the applicable period less average goodwill and other intangible assets during the applicable period.
             
    RECONCILIATION OF AVERAGE SHAREHOLDERS’ EQUITY TO AVERAGE TANGIBLE EQUITY:  
      THREE MONTHS ENDED  
      March 31, 2025 December 31, 2024 March 31, 2024  
    AVERAGE SHAREHOLDERS’ EQUITY $ 1,270,259 $ 1,247,680 $ 1,158,184  
    Less: Average goodwill and other intangible assets   162,938   163,221   164,137  
    AVERAGE TANGIBLE EQUITY $ 1,107,321 $ 1,084,459 $ 994,047  
             
    (d) Tangible equity divided by common shares outstanding at period end. Tangible equity equals total shareholders’ equity less goodwill and other intangible assets, in each case at the end of the period.
             
    RECONCILIATION OF TOTAL SHAREHOLDERS’ EQUITY TO TANGIBLE EQUITY:
      March 31, 2025 December 31, 2024 March 31, 2024  
    TOTAL SHAREHOLDERS’ EQUITY $ 1,279,042 $ 1,243,848 $ 1,161,979  
    Less: Goodwill and other intangible assets   162,758   163,032   163,927  
    TANGIBLE EQUITY $ 1,116,284 $ 1,080,816 $ 998,052  
             
    (e) Net income for each period divided by average tangible assets during the period. Average tangible assets equal average assets less average goodwill and other intangible assets, in each case during the applicable period.
             
    RECONCILIATION OF AVERAGE ASSETS TO AVERAGE TANGIBLE ASSETS  
      THREE MONTHS ENDED  
      March 31, 2025 December 31, 2024 March 31, 2024  
    AVERAGE ASSETS $ 10,045,607 $ 10,008,328 $ 9,863,378  
    Less: Average goodwill and other intangible assets   162,938   163,221   164,137  
    AVERAGE TANGIBLE ASSETS $ 9,882,669 $ 9,845,107 $ 9,699,241  
             
    (f) Tangible equity divided by tangible assets. Tangible assets equal total assets less goodwill and other intangible assets, in each case at the end of the period.
             
    RECONCILIATION OF TOTAL ASSETS TO TANGIBLE ASSETS:
      March 31, 2025 December 31, 2024 March 31, 2024  
    TOTAL ASSETS $ 9,886,612 $ 9,805,350 $ 9,881,077  
    Less: Goodwill and other intangible assets   162,758   163,032   163,927  
    TANGIBLE ASSETS $ 9,723,854 $ 9,642,318 $ 9,717,150  
             
    (g) Efficiency ratio is calculated by dividing total other expense by the sum of fully taxable equivalent net interest income and other income. Fully taxable equivalent net interest income reconciliation is shown assuming a 21% corporate federal income tax rate. Additionally, net interest margin is calculated on a fully taxable equivalent basis by dividing fully taxable equivalent net interest income by average interest earning assets, in each case during the applicable period.
             
    RECONCILIATION OF FULLY TAXABLE EQUIVALENT NET INTEREST INCOME TO NET INTEREST INCOME
      THREE MONTHS ENDED  
      March 31, 2025 December 31, 2024 March 31, 2024  
    Interest income $ 132,200 $ 133,613 $ 126,640  
    Fully taxable equivalent adjustment   607   617   616  
    Fully taxable equivalent interest income $ 132,807 $ 134,230 $ 127,256  
    Interest expense   27,823   30,168   31,017  
    Fully taxable equivalent net interest income $ 104,984 $ 104,062 $ 96,239  
             
    (h) Adjustments to net income for each period presented are detailed in the non-GAAP reconciliations of net interest income, provision for credit losses, other income, other expense and tax effect of adjustments to net income.
    (i) The tax effect of adjustments to net income was calculated assuming a 21% corporate federal income tax rate.
    (j) Pre-tax, pre-provision (“PTPP”) net income is calculated as net income, plus income taxes, plus the provision for credit losses, in each case during the applicable period. PTPP net income is a common industry metric utilized in capital analysis and review. PTPP is used to assess the operating performance of Park while excluding the impact of the provision for credit losses.
     
    RECONCILIATION OF PRE-TAX, PRE-PROVISION NET INCOME
      THREE MONTHS ENDED
      March 31, 2025 December 31, 2024 March 31, 2024
    Net income $ 42,157 $ 38,630 $ 35,204  
    Plus: Income taxes   9,046   8,703   7,211  
    Plus: Provision for credit losses   756   3,935   2,180  
    Pre-tax, pre-provision net income $ 51,959 $ 51,268 $ 44,595  
             
    (k) Effective January 1, 2023, Park adopted Accounting Standards Update (“ASU”) 2022-02. Among other things, this ASU eliminated the concept of troubled debt restructurings (“TDRs”). As a result of the adoption of this ASU and elimination of the concept of TDRs, total nonperforming loans (“NPLs”) and total nonperforming assets (“NPAs”) each decreased by $20.1 million effective January 1, 2023. Additionally, as a result of the adoption of this ASU, accruing individually evaluated loans decreased by $11.5 million effective January 1, 2023.
     

    The MIL Network

  • MIL-OSI Economics: Press Briefing Transcript: African Department, Spring Meetings 2025

    Source: International Monetary Fund

    April 25, 2025

    PARTICIPANTS:

    Speaker: ABEBE AEMRO SELASSIE, Director, African Department, IMF

    Moderator: KWABENA AKUAMOAH-BOATENG, Communications Officer, IMF

    *  *  *  *  *

    MR. AKUAMOAH-BOATENG: Good morning, good afternoon, and good evening to all of you here in the room and those joining us online. My name is Kwabena Akuamoah-Boateng.  I am with the Communications Department of the IMF, and

    I will be your moderator for today. 

    Welcome to today’s press briefing on the Regional Economic Outlook for Sub-Saharan Africa. I am pleased to introduce Abebe Aemro Selassie, Director of the IMF’s African Department.  Abebe will share key insights from our new report titled Recovery Interrupted

    But before I turn to Abebe, a reminder that we have simultaneous interpretation in French and Portuguese, both online and in the room.  And the materials for this press briefing, the report, are all available online at IMF.org/Africa. Abebe, the floor is yours.

    MR. SELASSIE: Good morning and good afternoon to colleagues joining us from the region and beyond. Thank you for being here today for the release of our April Regional Economic Outlook for Sub-Saharan Africa.

    Six months ago, I highlighted our region’s sluggish growth, and the steep political and social hurdles governments had to overcome to push through essential reforms.  Today, that fragile recovery faces a new test: the surge of global policy uncertainty so profound it is reshaping the region’s growth trajectory.

    Just when policy efforts began to bear fruit, with regional growth exceeding expectations in 2024, the region’s hard-won recovery has been overtaken by a sudden realignment of global priorities, casting a shadow over the outlook.  We now expect growth in Sub-Saharan Africa to ease to 3.8 percent in 2025 and 4.2 percent in 2026, marked down from our October projections, and these have been driven largely by difficult external conditions: weaker demand abroad, softer commodity prices, and tighter financial markets.

    Any further increase in trade tensions or tightening of financial conditions in advanced economies could further dampen regional confidence, raise borrowing costs further, and delay investment.  Meanwhile, official development assistance to Sub-Saharan Africa is likely to decline further, placing extra strain on the most vulnerable population.

    These external headwinds come on top of longer-standing vulnerabilities. High debt levels constrain the ability of many countries to finance essential services and development priorities.  While inflationary pressures have moderated at the regional level, quite a few countries are still grappling with elevated inflation, necessitating a tighter monetary stance and careful fiscal policy.

    Against this challenging backdrop, our report underscores the importance of calibrating policies to balance growth, social development, and macroeconomic stability.  Building robust fiscal and external buffers is more important than ever, underpinned by credibility and consistency in policymaking.

    In particular, there is a premium on policies to strengthen resilience: mobilize domestic revenue, improve spending efficiency, and strengthen public finance management and fiscal framework and fiscal frameworks to lower borrowing costs.  Reforms that enhance growth, improve the business climate, and foster regional trade integration are also needed to lay the groundwork for private sector-led growth.  High growth is imperative to engender the millions of jobs our region needs. 

    A strong, stable, and prosperous Sub-Saharan Africa is important for its people but also the world.  It is the region that will be the main source of labor and incremental investment and consumption demand in the decades to come.  External support as the region goes through its demographic transition is of tremendous strategic importance for the future of our planet. 

    The Fund is doing its part to help, having dispersed over $65 billion since 2020 and more than $8 billion just over the last year.  Our policy advice and capacity development efforts support more countries still. 

    Thank you and I’m happy to answer your questions. 

    MR. AKUAMOAH-BOATENG: Thank you, Abebe. Before we turn to you for your questions, a couple of ground rules, please. If you want to ask a question, raise your hand, and we’ll come to you.  Identify yourself and your organization and please limit it to one question.  For those online, you can use the chat function, or you can also raise your hand, and then we’ll come to you.  I will start from my right. 

    QUESTIONER: Good morning.  Thank you for taking my question.  You mentioned several things in your report.  The recovery that is going on the continent as well as some of the challenges that the continent is facing and the dividends that the continent currently has in its youth.  Leaders on the continent are working — I was at an event yesterday where they are looking at ways to raise funds to develop projects.  So, what is your recommendation for projects?  We’re seeing a need for projects like this as well as revenue mobilization on the continent.  So, is your recommendation to leaders on the continent on how to source these funds that are needed, given that some of the advanced economies are cutting back? 

    MR. AKUAMOAH-BOATENG: All right, any related questions before we go to Abebe?

    QUESTIONER: Abebe, you just made the point that the recovery has been hit by these uncertainties.  Beyond just policy direction, is there any scope to do anything in terms of, for example, maybe you dispense some money though, but maybe a little more to expect — to countries that are coming off defaults and what have you to help in this recovery, even at such a time?  This is also aided by, beyond the fact that some are coming, they have no buffers whatsoever.  And then, coming from defaults, things become very difficult for some of these countries to even have the money to do this.  Could there be any extra funding, even if on a regional level, to back the policy prescriptions that you have proposed? 

    MR. SELASSIE: I think there’s two different points here. The first one is more of a broader meta point, whether financing is the only constraint that is hindering more investment, more robust economic activity, and job creation. Of course, financing plays a role, but it is not the only constraint. It depends on country-to-country circumstances, what sectors we are talking about.  But it really is important to recognize that there are many other things that can be done to engender higher growth to facilitate more investment. 

    One of the issues that we have seen in our region over the years is that a lot of growth has –in many countries– been driven by public spending and public investment for many years.  That, of course, has made a major contribution.  It has facilitated all the investment that we have seen in infrastructure, building schools, building clinics.  So, that has a role to play. But I would say that going forward it will be as important to see if we can find ways in which the private sector is the main engine of growth. So, there are reforms that can be done to facilitate this growth. 

    The second one I am sensing from both your questions is about the circumstance right now where a combination of cuts in aid [and] tighter financing conditions are causing dislocation [and difficulties for governments. We have been, more than anybody else, stressing just what a difficult environment our governments have been facing.  We have been talking about the brutal funding squeeze that countries are under.  It has ebbed a little bit and flowed, you know, like the external market conditions, for example. There have been periods when they have been opened and some of our market access countries have been able to borrow, and then other periods where they have been closed, and we are going through one right now.  And this is on top of the cuts in aid that we have seen and tighter domestic financing conditions.  

    When this more cyclical point is playing out, I think it’s important for countries to be a bit more measured in how they are seeking to tackle their development needs.  So, maybe it means a bit more relying on domestic revenue mobilization, expenditure prioritization when conditions are particularly difficult as they are now, and, as I said earlier, going back to see what can be done to find ways to engender growth over the medium-term.  But it is a difficult period, as we note in our report, and one that is causing quite a bit of dislocation to our countries. 

    MR. AKUAMOAH-BOATENG: I will come to the middle. The lady in the front.

    QUESTIONER: My first question is around recovery, of course, your reports are called “interrupted”.  So, with recovery slipping, growth downgraded, debt pressures mountain, is Sub-Saharan Africa at risk of another lost decade?  Because in your report you mentioned that the last four years have been quite turbulent for Africa, and we are trying to get back on track.  What is IMF’s message on bold actions that leaders must take now to avoid being left behind in the global economy and to avoid Africa being in a permanent state of vulnerability?  Because we always hear that we are in a permanent state of vulnerability.  Then for Nigeria, macros are under threat right now.  How can the government — what are your suggestions on how the government can actually push through deep reforms that deliver tangible growth for its people?  Of course, for your report, you did mention the millions and millions of people that you know live below $2.15 a day. 

    MR. AKUAMOAH-BOATENG: Any more Nigeria questions? I will take the gentleman right here.

    QUESTIONER: In your report you said that debt has stabilized.  And when you look at Nigeria’s debt profile, what insights can you share as to where the borrowings are going to?  Are you seeing more of long-term loans or short-term loans?  So that’s one.  So, what — recently the World Bank expressed concerns about the performance of Nigeria’s statistical body, saying that the institution is performing Sub optimally.  Do you share that sentiment?  Thank you very much. 

    MR. AKUAMOAH-BOATENG: I will take one more on Nigeria. The gentleman in the first row.

    QUESTIONER: I [would] like to know in specific terms, Nigeria has already undertaken several reforms, especially removed oil subsidies and floated the naira.  What more specific things do you expect of Nigeria in terms of reform?

    MR. AKUAMOAH-BOATENG: All right, thank you. Abebe?

    MR. SELASSIE: So, in terms of the reforms that have been going on in Nigeria and the particularities of the challenge, the first thing to note is that we have been really impressed by how much reforms have been undertaken in recent years. Most notably, trying to go to the heart of the cause of the macroeconomic imbalances in Nigeria, which are related to the fact that, oil subsidies were taking up a very large share of the limited tax revenues that the government have and not necessarily being used in the most effective way to help the most vulnerable people. The issues related to the imbalances on the external side with the exchange rate extremely out of line. 

    So it’s been really good to see the government taking these on, head-on, address those, and also beginning to roll out the third component of the reforms that we have been advocating for and of course, the government has been pursuing, which is to expand social protection, to target generalized subsidies to help the most vulnerable.  This has all been very good to see, but more can be done, particularly on the latter front, expanding social protection and enhancing a lot more transparency in the oil sector so that the removal of subsidies does translate into flow of revenue into the government budget.  So, there is still a bit more work to do in these areas. 

    We just had a mission in Nigeria where there was extensive discussions on these and other issues on the macroeconomic area, but also other areas where there is a need to do reforms to engender more private sector investment and also how more resources can be devoted to help Nigeria generate the revenues it so desperately needs to build more schools, more universities, and, of course, more infrastructure.  So, there is a comprehensive set of reforms that Nigeria can pursue that would help engender more growth and help diversify the economy away from reliance on oil.  And this diversification is, of course, all the more important given what we are seeing happening to commodity prices.  So, I think this is an important agenda. 

    Second, as the government is doing this, of course there will be a financing need.  And here what is needed is really a judicious and agile way of dealing with the financing challenges the country faces.  In the long run, the financing gap can only be filled by permanent sources such as revenue mobilization.  But in the interim, carefully looking at all the options the country must borrow in a contained way will be part of that solution.  And I think the government has been going about this prudently and cautiously so far, and we are encouraged by that. 

    And lastly, on data issues in Nigeria we really applaud the effort the government’s making to try and revise and upgrade data quality in Nigeria.  This task is not an easy one in our countries, given the extent of informality there is, given the extent of relative price changes that play out in our economies.  So doing this cautiously is what is needed methodically.  And that is exactly what we see happening.  We welcome, though, the efforts the government is making because without good data, it is difficult to make good policies.  So, we really applaud the effort the government is making to try and upgrade data quality. 

    MR. AKUAMOAH-BOATENG: We will take a round of questions online.

    QUESTIONER: There are bills in the UK Parliament and the New York State Assembly that aim to force holdout private creditors to accept debt treatments on comparable terms to other creditors and to limit or stop such litigation.  Are these bills needed, do you think, or is the current international debt architecture sufficient?  So, you know, IMF, DSAs, creditor groups, the common framework, where applicable. 

    MR. AKUAMOAH-BOATENG: Please go ahead with your question.

    QUESTIONER: Earlier this month, the IMF reached a staff-level agreement with Burkina Faso to complete the Third Review of the country’s program.  So as part of the review, the IMF allowed a greater fiscal flexibility, allowing Burkina Faso to raise its public deficit target to 4 percent, up from the 2 percent cap set by the West African Economic Monetary Union.  So, given that the country’s challenges, such as persistent insecurity, high social demands, are common across the region, wouldn’t it be wiser to consider applying this flexibility more broadly to the West African Economic Monetary Union?  And my second question will be about the downward revision of the growth forecast for 2025 and 2026 in Sub-Saharan Africa.  Does the IMF view this new crisis – I am talking about the global uncertainty and the recent U.S. tariff measures.  Does the IMF view this crisis as potentially more severe and with broader consequences for the region than previous shocks such as COVID and the war in Ukraine? 

    MR. SELASSIE: On the first question on debt workouts and the challenges there, I am not fully informed about the specifics of the bills that Rachel, you are talking about, indeed, we have seen from time to time some private creditor groups holding out, trying to hold out, but I am not sure that a bill is what’s needed, but rather, force of argument to try and bring people to the table. And in recent restructurings, at least I am not aware of this being the main hindrance in advancing discussions.  There have been many other factors, including just the complexity of the current creditor landscape, that have played a role. 

    On Burkina Faso, flexibility under the program or the deficit targets for the WAEMU countries more generally, just it is important to distinguish between particular years’ fiscal deficit targets that the government wants to pursue and we, incorporate in the program and just the more medium-term criteria, convergence criteria that there is for the WAEMU countries. 

    So, the 3 percent target criteria are for the medium- to long-term.  And it has been very clear that when there are shocks or when there are pressing social development needs, countries do have the scope to deviate from that.  In fact, often the constraint on the Sahel countries has been not having enough, sufficient, enough financing to be able to meet these to advance development objectives.  The other constraint of course is that overall, the more you exceed this 3 percent target and add to the overall debt burden, the more you are going to have – you are likely to build up debt vulnerabilities. 

    So, in the work that we do with countries, whether it is Burkina Faso or other WAEMU countries or indeed beyond, what we try and help with is of course to help countries strike this balance between addressing the immediate and pressing needs that they have while avoiding medium-term debt sustainability problems.  I think one is just thinking about how to strike this balance.  And then second, we put resources on the table very cheaply to help countries, avoid, at least in the near term, more difficult financing difficulties.  So, for Burkina and others, it is just about striking this balance.

    And on growth, whether this latest shock is as bad for the region as the previous ones. I think it is really important also to point out that as difficult, I mean the last four or five years have been incredibly difficult time for our countries, a lot of challenges, a lot of dislocation, but there is also been quite a lot of resilience, and I think that is important to stress.  I would note that, even now, it is this year, 11 out of the 20 fastest growing economies in the world are from Sub-Saharan Africa.  So, there are quite a lot of countries that are going to be sustaining significant growth in the region.  So, we should also not lose sight of this resilience. 

    Second, and more broadly, the buildup of uncertainties I think is very negative.  And this is interrupting what we are seeing in terms of a recovery.  But growth is not, we are not projecting growth to collapse.  And our hope is that as things calm down, the region can resume its growth trajectory also.

    MR. AKUAMOAH-BOATENG: We will take three more questions online, then we will come back to the room.

    QUESTIONER: I wanted to know about Senegal, in terms of whether funds would be repaid after the misreporting of data and if the IMF has learned anything from that?  And also, just if you can, the status of the IMF’s programs and even operations in Sudan and South Sudan? 

    MR. AKUAMOAH-BOATENG: Please go ahead.

    QUESTIONER: The IMF is urging countries to focus on domestic revenue mobilization.  But you may have seen that South Africa’s Finance Minister has withdrawn the VAT increase that he had proposed in the budget, in the face of opposition from coalition partners.  Does the IMF see any alternative sources of revenue that are feasible for the South African government as the parties hoped?  And are there any lessons here for other countries trying to mobilize domestic revenue?                                                         

    QUESTIONER: Building on the question that Hilary has asked that the REO does make the case for domestic revenue mobilization, and you made that argument, I believe, in the last two Regional Economic Outlook reports as well.  But poverty is still endemic.  Incomes, as far as I can tell, have not really recovered to pre-pandemic levels.  So other than broadcast to tax exemptions what else can be done to raise tax-to-GDP ratios?  One last question on this.  Has there been any progress that has been made in the Sovereign Debt Roundtable in deciding how debt from Afreximbank, and Trade and Development Bank should be treated, at least under the common framework for countries like Ghana and Zambia?  Now, do they qualify to not have their debt restructured in the same way that the IMF, the World Bank’s credit lines?

    MR. SELASSIE: On Senegal, I was recently in Dakar for discussions building on work that our team has been doing. What we are waiting for is the government to finalize the work that’s ongoing.  Right now, the audits are going on and reconciliation work is going on. 

    On the extent of domestic and external debt.  We have been very clear in welcoming the transparency and really robust and collegial way in which the government has been engaging on the issues that have arisen in the misreporting case and we look forward to the numbers stabilizing, and engaging in discussions on the next steps in terms of bringing the, the findings to our Executive Board and next steps in our engagement with Senegal. 

    On South Sudan, it has just been a difficult period of course for South Sudan.  They have been hosting hundreds of thousands of refugees fleeing from the conflict in the north.  The conflict has also interrupted, disrupted heavily their main source of tax revenue, oil exports through the pipeline.  So, it’s been a really wrenching period.  Over the last three, four years we have provided, you know, we have been trying to provide South Sudan with emergency financing and trying to find a way in which we can engage with a more structured longer-term program.  We remain hopeful that we are going to be able to do that.  But first and foremost, I think we need to see what can be done to make sure that the policy making environment is as robust and as strong as it is, and as transparent, so we can come in, step in and support South Sudan.

    On revenue mobilization, I want to just first link this to the point I made earlier that what we have observed and again there is a risk of generalizing, but what we’ve observed over the last 10, 15 years in the region is that governments have made a very significant effort to invest in really important infrastructure needs in building schools, in building health clinics and much else.  And you see very positive outcomes.  Look at the electricity coverage in our region, look at the human development indicators and how much they have moved over the years in the region. 

    But we have also seen that despite a lot of investment, for example, in electricity generation capacity and electricity coverage in our countries, many roads are being built.  The returns of all this investment have not been captured in the tax revenue, which is one of the points, the pressure points where debt levels have gone up and the interest-to-revenue ratio.  So, the interest payment-to-revenue ratio has also been rising.  And this has been one of the key points of vulnerability in many economies and why a few countries have gotten into debt difficulty and needed to restructure. 

    So going forward, I think it’s very clear that to be able to continue investing; to be able to continue expanding economies and the government doing its core function, it has to find more ways other than borrowing to address this. 

    Now, in the past, governments have been quick to cut spending, and that has, we found, again and again, to be very detrimental to development progress and growth outcomes.  I think this, again, at the risk of generalizing, was the approach that was generally pursued in the 1980s and found to be very problematic, very challenging, very depressing to growth.  So, we would very much love for countries to avoid this. When there are pressing spending needs, there’s generally only a couple of ways that you can finance this.  Spending cuts or revenue mobilization.  You can borrow, of course, but as I said, borrowing is not optimal. 

    Now, this doesn’t mean revenue mobilization is easy.  Far, far from it. It requires not only political engagement, but also a lot of communication, a lot of effort to show that the resources the government is trying to generate are going to be going to the right areas to help strengthen the social contract.  So, it’s a deep and engaged process, and we are very, very cognizant of that.  But I do think that this is the most optimal way, the most economically sensible way in which our countries can help address the tremendous development needs that we have.

    Now, specifically on South Africa, ultimately when issues like this arise, these are deeply domestic political issues to be resolved as to what the best way to do the financing is.  So, if a tax rate increase for a particular tax is not possible, then maybe finding ways to expand the tax base, maybe trying different tax angles or if all of those are not possible, then revisiting spending priorities may be one of the ways that countries must handle this.  And this is typically what we see playing out in countries in the region when financing constraints are binding. 

    So, whether it is in Kenya, South Africa, or other countries the issue of revenue mobilization is a live one, but one that is extremely complex.  We are very cognizant of that.  And one that requires quite a lot of consensus building, quite a lot of discussion to be able to advance, and of course, broader societal support.  And we absolutely see countries engaging in this and do what we can to help bring lessons from other countries where we are asked to.

    Then there was a question about the GSDR.  So, this Global Sovereign Debt Roundtable, this is the initiative launched by the Fund and the Bank to try and bring creditors and debtors together around the table to find ways in which debt work[outs] can be easier because you are discussing general principles rather than country-specific debt restructuring issues. And we have seen this making quite a lot of progress. Perhaps the most recent development has been the preparation of a debt work[out] playbook that is a very helpful document that has been put out building on the experience of recent work[outs].  What has worked particularly well.  What kind of information sharing ahead of debt work[outs] have been helpful in terms of accelerating debt processes.  Debt restructurings are one of the most contentious and challenging issues that there are between states, between creditors and debtors, and it requires quite a lot of discussion, and it is not such an easy thing to do, including what the parameter of debt should be.  I think one of the questions that was raised is about the debt parameter.  This is fundamentally an issue for the debtor countries and creditors to resolve, and intra-creditor disputes also have to be done. 

    So, in terms of the principles that generally we see creditors apply when these kinds of disputes arise about what the right parameter should be or not and who gets preferential treatment. I think there’s generally been two rules of thumb. One is that the terms in which new financing is being provided or the financing is provided, whether it’s commercial or concessional has been a factor that most creditors look at in terms of whether a particular credit should be included in the parameter or not, and then also the extent to which new financing is being made available.  So, what differentiates senior creditors like the IMF, the World Bank, of course, is that for most countries we operate providing concessional financing very long-term.  And we are the ones that come in and provide financing consistently through crisis and otherwise. 

    MR. AKUAMOAH-BOATENG: We have time for one more round of questions. I will start with the gentleman in the front here. 

    QUESTIONER: The U.S. is your largest shareholder, and we are seeing mixed messages this week from the Treasury Secretary mentioning that he remains committed to the Fund but also calling on you to hold countries accountable to program performance, empower staff to walk away if reform commitment is lacking. 

    So, I wanted to ask you, should we expect the IMF spigot to start closing in response to U.S. pressure?  Or if not, are you changing your approach to countries, what you are telling them and how to deal with their issues?  Are you being a little more stringent in your requirements? 

    You have talked about Senegal, maybe Ghana, Ethiopia, related to that issue of the U.S stepping in.  The CEMAC negotiations this week, we saw American energy companies working with the CEMAC on repatriation of funds dedicated to the rehabilitation of oil sites.  I’m wondering if you have a stance on that, what the IMF position is?  I understand the U.S is trying to get the IMF involved in that.

    MR. AKUAMOAH-BOATENG: All right, thanks. Gentleman. 

    QUESTIONER: Kenyan authorities here have indicated the need to present a credible fiscal framework as they try and unlock a new program for Kenya.  Would you offer more color into the discussions this week, noting again that the same credibility questions led to the cancellation or the termination of the program at its final review?  

    MR. AKUAMOAH-BOATENG: We have a question online “what is the IMF’s view on Kenya’s debt position?”

    MR. SELASSIE: So, on the first question, I would like to refer you to Kristalina who gave comprehensive responses to the Secretary’s IMFC Statement. What I want to add though is that in the region, in Sub-Saharan Africa, in terms of programs, the calibration of reforms, incorporation of reforms, I would say that we are always in terms of each program has its particularities and what we always try and do in these programs is make sure that we’re striking a balance of helping countries address the long term challenges and also the cyclical challenges that are often the ones that cause them to come to us.  And I would say that I don’t think there are many countries that think that the adjustment efforts that they’re being asked to make are easy ones.

    On CEMAC.  Just to be very clear there is this dispute that is going on between member states, the BEAC, and oil companies with respect to what are called restitution funds.  The funds under contracts that countries have with oil companies are meant to be available to help restore the sites where oil is extracted back to their pre-extraction standards. 

    What has been a bit frustrating is that we are not privy to the contents of these documents. We have been calling on members and the companies involved to be transparent about this, to publish these documents.  They are after all documents that are about how countries natural resource wealth are used.  And we’ve been on record going seven, eight, nine years pushing for production sharing agreements, the terms of these things to be published so that each side can hold the other accountable.  I think that is the first thing that could be done to bring more transparency and light and understanding to the rest of the world about what is going on in these discussions. 

    Second, we have also made it clear to both parties that given that we do not have full information, it is difficult for us to know what to say.  But in general, any encumbrances in terms of how we look at foreign exchange reserves and these standards are published, any encumbrances like the type that we think there may be in the document, i.e., that is the expectation that these resources will be used for specific purposes means they’re not general use reserves.  So, they would not be classified as part of reserves. 

    On Kenya, we have had a very strong engagement with Kenya over the years and will continue to have such engagement going forward.  As we have noted, government has asked for a follow-on program to try and address the remaining challenges in Kenya, and we are discussing how to do that including in the context of these meetings. 

    It has been good to hear and see that the economy has been performing quite well in some parts.  Particularly the external adjustment front seems to have been proceeding well.  The current account has been narrowing.  So, there are quite a lot of strengths.  But also of course there remain fiscal challenges which were a significant part of the last program’s objectives that need to be advanced.  So, we are going to engage with the government and do everything that we can to be able to help it go forward. 

    MR. AKUAMOAH-BOATENG: Unfortunately, that is all the time we have. So, if you have any questions that we didn’t get to, please send them to me or to Media at IMF.org and we will try and get back to you as soon as possible.  So, also to mention that the report is now available at IMF.org/Africa.  The Spring Meetings continue.  Later this morning, we have the press briefing for the European Department and later in the afternoon we have the IMFC, and the Western Hemisphere Department press briefings. 

    On behalf of Abebe and the African and Communications Departments, thank you all for coming to this press briefing and see you next time. 

    IMF Communications Department
    MEDIA RELATIONS

    PRESS OFFICER: Kwabena Akuamoah-Boateng

    Phone: +1 202 623-7100Email: MEDIA@IMF.org

    MIL OSI Economics

  • MIL-OSI Global: Trump’s tariffs: poor workers in countries like Cambodia will be among the biggest losers

    Source: The Conversation – UK – By Sabina Lawreniuk, Principal Research Fellow, University of Nottingham

    I Love Coffee dot Today/Shutterstock

    Politicians and economists have been pretty vocal in their response to the ongoing saga of Donald Trump’s tariffs. But much less has been heard from the world’s poorest workers about how they will be affected.

    For when the US president first set out his reciprocal tariffs – later paused for 90 days – some of the highest rates were for countries like Vietnam (46%), Bangladesh (37%) and Cambodia (49%).

    These are places that make huge amounts of the clothes we wear, and even the reduced 10% tariff could be a big blow to their economies – and the people who depend on them.

    Because aside from the well known sweatshop conditions suffered by many workers in these places, brands and manufacturers often offset new costs by passing them on to workers in the form of lower wages and higher demands.

    This phenomenon, sometimes referred to as “social downgrading”, was seen during the pandemic, when garment workers around the world faced mass layoffs and even worse working conditions to protect corporate profits when consumer demand decreased.

    And those working conditions are already challenging. The minimum wage for one of Cambodia’s 1 million garment workers (from a total population of 16 million) is just US$208 (£155.50) per month.

    Around 80% of those workers are women, whose wages often support children and elderly parents, who don’t have the security of a state pension safety net.

    It is these workers and their families who may end losing the most in Trump’s trade war. But they are used to geopolitics affecting their everyday lives, having suffered the impact of tariffs fairly recently – from the EU.

    In 2020, Cambodia’s duty-free, quota-free access to the EU market (usually granted to developing countries) was partially revoked as a punitive response to human rights concerns. Tariffs averaging 11% were added to some product lines, mostly clothing and footwear, which covered about 20% of Cambodia’s total exports to the EU.

    The Cambodian government immediately responded by cutting public holidays and workplace benefits to try offset any increase in costs.

    It has since slowed the rate of minimum wage growth to below inflation. Both actions slashed real wages and made the challenge of economic survival even harder for those who depend on the industry.

    Now, as Trump’s latest tariffs take hold – even at the lower rate of 10% – many garment and footwear industry workers will fear for their jobs.

    But even those “lucky” enough to keep them will face mounting pressures to produce more, and more quickly, to offset rising costs – at the direct expense of their own financial security and wellbeing.

    The idea that tariffs will ultimately bring jobs back to the US ignores that fact that these jobs – precarious, underpaid and frequently dangerous – are not the kind of jobs that any American would want.

    International supply chains are deeply embedded.
    PX Media/Shutterstock

    Supply chained

    And the evidence suggests that if even if they did want them, international manufacturing supply chains are more deeply embedded than people might think.

    After the EU imposed its tariffs on Cambodia for example, brands could have looked to circumvent those added costs by relocating production. As it turned out, the volume of trade between Cambodia and the EU has remained steady since – because sometimes there’s no alternative.

    With Cambodia, companies have not been willing or able to shift production to competitors like Bangladesh, Myanmar or Sri Lanka, partly due to the political volatility in those countries.

    Added to this is the fact that clothes production has become highly specialised geographically. Cambodia’s distance from the EU means it focuses mainly on seasonal fashion “basics” such as T-shirts and knitwear.

    Closer countries like Turkey and Morocco concentrate on the latest fast fashion trends, as their shorter shipping routes mean they can be quicker to respond to changing tastes.

    It is not that easy to unsettle the systems and markets that are already in place.

    As a result, in the global garment industry at least, Trump’s tariffs may not trigger a complete restructuring of the world’s supply chains. In the short term, they are instead likely to cause great uncertainty, reducing investors’ appetite for long-term planning, and reducing their confidence.

    Orders may slow and prices may rise. And Cambodians making the world’s T-shirts and trainers will face even more pressure on their wages and working conditions.

    Sabina Lawreniuk receives funding from UKRI through a Future Leaders Fellowship (grant ref MR/ W013797/1).

    ref. Trump’s tariffs: poor workers in countries like Cambodia will be among the biggest losers – https://theconversation.com/trumps-tariffs-poor-workers-in-countries-like-cambodia-will-be-among-the-biggest-losers-254408

    MIL OSI – Global Reports

  • MIL-OSI Security: Ex-Congressman George Santos Sentenced to 87 Months in Prison for Wire Fraud and Aggravated Identity Theft

    Source: Office of United States Attorneys

    Santos Filed Fraudulent FEC Reports, Embezzled Funds from Campaign Donors, Stole Identities, Charged Credit Cards Without Authorization, Obtained Unemployment Benefits Through Fraud, and Lied in Reports to the U.S. House of Representatives

    Former Congressman George Anthony Devolder Santos was sentenced today by United States District Judge Joanna Seybert at the federal courthouse in Central Islip to 87 months in prison for committing wire fraud and aggravated identity theft.  As part of the sentence, Santos was ordered to pay restitution to his victims in the amount of $373,749.97 and $205,002.97 in forfeiture.  Santos pleaded guilty in August 2024.  

    John J. Durham, United States Attorney for the Eastern District of New York; Matthew R. Galeotti, Head of the Department of Justice’s Criminal Division; Christopher G. Raia, Assistant Director in Charge, Federal Bureau of Investigation, New York Field Office (FBI); Harry T. Chavis, Jr., Special Agent in Charge, Internal Revenue Service Criminal Investigation, New York (IRS-CI New York); and Anne T. Donnelly, Nassau County District Attorney announced the sentence.

    “Today, George Santos was finally held accountable for the mountain of lies, theft, and fraud he perpetrated.  For the defendant, it was judgment day, and for his many victims including campaign donors, political parties, government agencies, elected bodies, his own family members, and his constituents, it is justice,” stated U.S. Attorney Durham.  “To Mr. Santos and other dishonest individuals of that ilk, who lie, steal identities and commit frauds to get elected to public office, this prosecution speaks to the truth that my Office is committed to aggressively rooting out public corruption and that public officials who criminally abuse our electoral process will end up in a federal prison.”

    Mr. Durham expressed his appreciation to the U.S. Department of Labor, Office of Inspector General and the New York State Department of Labor, for their assistance.

    FBI Assistant Director in Charge Raia stated, “Today, former United States Congressman George Santos is held accountable for his repeated criminal dishonesty – financing his election campaign with ill-obtained funds, stealing COVID unemployment benefits, and providing materially false information in his financial disclosure. Santos abused his authority to garner illicit donations and campaign support; ultimately betraying the public’s trust and violating our democratic systems.  May today’s sentencing emphasize the FBI’s continued commitment to dismantling any fraudulent scheme designed to unlawfully benefit those in positions of power.”

    “George Santos blatantly disregarded campaign finance laws and abused the trust of his constituents and contributors.  While he may have made a mockery of his position in public office, today’s sentencing is justice for those he has wronged.  CI New York proudly worked with the Eastern District of New York, the FBI and Nassau County DA’s office to ensure that Santos faces the consequences of his years of deception,” stated IRS-CI New York Special Agent in Charge Chavis.

    “George Santos spent his brief career in public service conning his donors and constituents until the deceit caught up to him and he was exposed as an opportunist and a fraud.  Today’s lengthy prison sentence is a just ending for a weaver of lies who believed he was above the law,” stated Nassau County District Attorney Donnelly. “Being elected to represent any community is accepting a solemn responsibility and a position of great trust. George Santos failed the people he was elected to represent in Nassau County and Queens.  He broke that trust and traded in his integrity for designer clothes and a luxury lifestyle. I will continue to work with my partners to root out public corruption and ensure that the crucial standards to which we hold our elected officials and public institutions are upheld.” 

    The counts to which Santos pled guilty relate to the following criminal scheme, as set forth in the superseding indictment:

    The Party Program Scheme

    During the 2022 election cycle, Santos was a candidate for the United States House of Representatives in New York’s Third Congressional District.  Nancy Marks, who pleaded guilty on October 5, 2023 to related conduct, was the treasurer for his principal congressional campaign committee, Devolder-Santos for Congress.  During this election cycle, Santos and Marks devised and executed a fraudulent scheme to obtain money for the campaign by submitting materially false reports to the Federal Election Commission (FEC), in which they inflated the campaign’s fundraising numbers for the purpose of misleading the FEC, a national party committee, and the public.

    The purpose of the scheme was to ensure that Santos and his campaign qualified for a program administered by the national party committee to provide financial and logistical support to Santos’s campaign.  To qualify for the program, Santos had to demonstrate, among other things, that his congressional campaign had raised at least $250,000 from third-party contributors in a single quarter.

    To create the public appearance that his campaign had met that financial benchmark and was otherwise financially viable, Santos and Marks agreed to falsely report to the FEC that at least 11 of their family members had made significant financial contributions to the campaign.  In fact, Santos and Marks both knew that these individuals had neither made the reported contributions nor given authorization for their personal information to be included in such false public reports.  In addition, Santos and Marks knew that the national party committee relied on FEC fundraising data to evaluate candidates’ qualification for the program, and agreed to falsely report to the FEC that Santos had loaned the campaign significant sums of money, when, in fact, Santos had not made the reported loans and, at the time the loans were reported, did not have the funds necessary to make such loans.  These falsely reported loans included one for $500,000 when in fact Santos had less than $8,000 in his personal and business bank accounts.

    Through the execution of this scheme, Santos and Marks ensured that Santos met the necessary financial benchmarks to qualify for the program administered by the national party committee.  As a result of qualifying for the program, the congressional campaign received significant financial support.

    As part of his plea agreement, Santos stipulated that he had engaged in the following additional criminal conduct, as set forth in the superseding indictment and other court filings, and agreed that this criminal conduct would be considered by the Court at the time of sentencing:

    The Credit Card Fraud Scheme

    Between approximately July 2020 and October 2022, Santos devised and executed a fraudulent scheme to steal the personal identity and financial information of contributors to his campaign.  He then repeatedly charged contributors’ credit cards without their authorization.  Because of these unauthorized transactions, funds were transferred to Santos’s campaign, to the campaigns of other candidates for elected office, and to his own bank account.  To conceal the true source of these funds and to circumvent campaign contribution limits, Santos falsely represented in FEC filings that some of the campaign contributions were made by other persons, such as his relatives or associates, rather than the true cardholders.  Santos did not have authorization to use their names in this way.  In furtherance of the scheme, Santos sought out victims he knew were elderly persons suffering from cognitive impairment or decline.

    Fraudulent Political Contribution Solicitation Scheme

    Beginning in September 2022, during his successful campaign for Congress, Santos operated a limited liability company (Company #1) through which he defrauded prospective political supporters.  Santos enlisted a Queens-based political consultant (Person #1) to communicate with prospective donors on Santos’s behalf.  Santos directed Person #1 to falsely tell donors that, among other things, their money would be used to help elect Santos to the House, including by purchasing television advertisements.  In reliance on these false statements, two donors (Contributor #1 and Contributor #2) each transferred $25,000 to Company #1’s bank account, which Santos controlled.

    Shortly after the funds were received into Company #1’s bank account, the money was transferred into Santos’s personal bank accounts—in one instance laundered through two of Santos’s personal accounts.  Santos then used much of that money for personal expenses.  Among other things, Santos used the funds to make personal purchases, including of designer clothing, to withdraw cash, to discharge personal debts, and to transfer money to his associates.

    Unemployment Insurance Fraud Scheme

    Beginning in approximately February 2020, Santos was employed as a Regional Director of a Florida-based investment firm (Investment Firm #1).  By late March 2020, in response to the outbreak of COVID-19 in the United States, new legislation was signed into law that provided additional federal funding to assist out-of-work Americans during the pandemic.

    In mid-June 2020, although he was employed and not eligible for unemployment benefits, Santos applied for government assistance through the New York State Department of Labor (NYS DOL), claiming falsely to have been unemployed since March 2020.  From that point until April 2021—during which time Santos was working and receiving a salary on a near-continuous basis, and throughout his first unsuccessful run for Congress—he falsely affirmed each week that he was eligible for unemployment benefits when he was not.  As a result, Santos fraudulently received more than $24,000 in unemployment insurance benefits.

    False Statements to the House of Representatives

    Santos, like all candidates for the House, had a legal duty to file with the Clerk of the United States House of Representatives a Financial Disclosure Statement (House Disclosures) before each election.  In his House Disclosures, Santos was personally required to give a full and complete accounting of his assets, income, and liabilities, among other things.  He certified that his House Disclosures were true, complete, and correct.

    In September 2022, in connection with his second campaign for election to the House, Santos filed a House Disclosure in which he vastly overstated his income and assets.  In this House Disclosure, he falsely certified that during the reporting period:

    • He had earned $750,000 in salary from the Devolder Organization LLC, a Florida‑based entity of which Santos was the sole beneficial owner;
    • He had received between $1,000,001 and $5 million in dividends from the Devolder Organization LLC;
    • He had a checking account with deposits of between $100,001 and $250,000; and
    • He had a savings account with deposits of between $1 million and $5 million.

    These assertions were false: Santos had not received from the Devolder Organization LLC the reported amounts of salary or dividends and did not maintain checking or savings accounts with deposits in the reported amounts.  Further, Santos failed to disclose that, in 2021, he received approximately $28,000 in income from Investment Firm #1 and more than $20,000 in unemployment insurance benefits from the NYS DOL.

    The government’s case is being handled by the Office’s Public Integrity Section and the Criminal Section of the Office’s Long Island Division, along with the Public Integrity Section of the Department of Justice’s Criminal Division.  Assistant United States Attorneys Ryan Harris, Anthony Bagnuola, and Laura Zuckerwise, along with Trial Attorney John Taddei, are in charge of the prosecution, with assistance from Paralegal Specialists Rachel Friedman and Dinora Orozco.

    The Defendant:

    GEORGE ANTHONY DEVOLDER SANTOS
    Age: 36
    Queens, New York

    E.D.N.Y. Docket No. 23-CR-197 (S-2) (JS)

    MIL Security OSI

  • MIL-OSI: Penns Woods Bancorp, Inc. Reports First Quarter 2025 Earnings

    Source: GlobeNewswire (MIL-OSI)

    WILLIAMSPORT, Pa., April 25, 2025 (GLOBE NEWSWIRE) — Penns Woods Bancorp, Inc. (NASDAQ: PWOD)

    Penns Woods Bancorp, Inc. achieved net income of $7.4 million for the three months ended March 31, 2025, resulting in basic earnings per share of $0.97 and diluted earnings per share of $0.95.

    Highlights

    • Net income, as reported under generally accepted accounting principles (GAAP), for the three months ended March 31, 2025 was $7.4 million, compared $3.8 million for the same period of 2024. Results for the three months ended March 31, 2025 compared to 2024 were impacted by an increase in net interest income of $2.4 million, as the net interest margin expanded. The three month period ended March 31, 2025 has been impacted by after-tax merger related expenses of $948,000 resulting from the announced acquisition of the company by Northwest Bancshares, Inc. The disposal of assets related to two former branch properties resulted in a one time after-tax loss of $261,000 for the three month period ended March 31, 2024.
    • The allowance for credit losses was impacted for the three months ended March 31, 2025 by a negative provision for credit losses of $3.0 million, compared to a provision for credit losses of $138,000 for the 2024 period. The recognition of a negative provision for credit losses for the 2025 period was due primarily to a recovery on a commercial loan of $1.3 million. The recovery, coupled with a decline in the historical loss rates over the look back period, reduced the probability of default and loss given default applied to the loan portfolio when determining the level of the allowance for credit losses.
    • Basic and diluted earnings per share for the three months ended March 31, 2025 were $0.97 and $0.95, respectively. This compares to basic and diluted earnings per share of $0.51 for the three month period ended March 31, 2024.
    • Annualized return on average assets was 1.31% for the three months ended March 31, 2025, compared to 0.69% for the corresponding period of 2024.
    • Annualized return on average equity was 14.76% for the three months ended March 31, 2025, compared to 8.03% for the corresponding period of 2024.

    Net Income

    Net income from core operations (“core earnings”), which is a non-GAAP measure of net income excluding net securities gains or losses and merger expenses, was $8.1 million for the three months ended March 31, 2025 compared to $3.8 million for the same period of 2024. Core earnings per share (non-GAAP) for the three months ended March 31, 2025 were basic $1.06 and diluted $1.04. Basic and diluted core earnings per share for the same period of 2024 were $0.51. Annualized core return on average assets and core return on average equity (non-GAAP) were 1.43% and 16.15%, respectively, for the three months ended March 31, 2025, compared to 0.69% and 8.09% for the corresponding period of 2024. A reconciliation of the non-GAAP financial measures of core earnings, core return on assets, core return on equity, core earnings per share and tangible book value per share to the comparable GAAP financial measures is included at the end of this press release.

    Net Interest Margin

    The net interest margin for the three months ended March 31, 2025 was 3.13% compared to 2.69% for the corresponding period of 2024. The increase in the net interest margin for the three month period was driven by an increase in the rate collected on interest-earning assets of 38 basis points (“bps”). The overall market conditions over the periods resulted in increases to the yield on the earnings asset portfolio and a decrease in the rate paid on interest-bearing deposits. Driving the increase in the yield and interest income on the earning assets portfolio was the repricing of legacy assets, portfolio growth, and the recognition of $223,000 in interest from a recovery on a commercial loan. The average loan portfolio balance increased $41.8 million for the three month period ended March 31, 2025 compared to the same period of 2024 as the average yield on the portfolio increased 40 bps, resulting in an increase in taxable equivalent interest income of $2.2 million for the period. The three month period ended March 31, 2025 was impacted by an increase of 30 bps in the yield earned on the securities portfolio as legacy securities matured, which offset the impact of a decrease in average securities balance of $15.0 million. Short-term borrowings decreased leading to a decrease of $949,000 in expense for the three month period ended March 31, 2025 compared to the same period of 2024. The rate paid on interest-bearing deposits increased 4 bps, or $781,000, in expense for the three month period ended March 31, 2025 compared to the corresponding period of 2024 due to the rate environment, an increase in competition for deposits, increased utilization of brokered deposits, and a migration of deposit balances from core deposits to higher rate time deposits. The average balance of time deposits increased $99.9 million from the three month period ended March 31, 2024 to 2025 as the rate paid on the funds decreased 9 bps. In addition, brokered deposits have been utilized to assist with funding the loan portfolio growth and contributed to the increase in time deposit balances, while lowering the reliance on higher cost short-term borrowings.

    Assets

    Total assets increased to $2.3 billion at March 31, 2025, an increase of $42.1 million compared to March 31, 2024.  Net loans increased $43.3 million to $1.9 billion at March 31, 2025 compared to March 31, 2024, as continued emphasis was placed on commercial loan growth and indirect auto lending. The investment portfolio decreased $14.3 million from March 31, 2024 to March 31, 2025 as the portfolio cash flow is being utilized to fund loan growth. Short-term and long-term borrowings decreased $28.3 million and $47.2 million, respectively, from March 31, 2024 to March 31, 2025 as deposit growth allowed for a reduction in total borrowings.

    Non-performing Loans

    The ratio of non-performing loans to total loans ratio increased to 0.53% at March 31, 2025 from 0.43% at March 31, 2024, as non-performing loans increased to $10.0 million at March 31, 2025 from $8.0 million at March 31, 2024. The majority of non-performing loans involve loans that are either in a secured position and have sureties with a strong underlying financial position or have been classified as individually evaluated loans that have a specific allocation recorded within the allowance for credit losses. Net loan recoveries of $957,000 for the three months ended March 31, 2025, impacted the allowance for credit losses, which was 0.54% of total loans at March 31, 2025 compared to 0.62% at March 31, 2024. Exposure to non-owner occupied office space is minimal at $13.7 million at March 31, 2025 with none of these loans being delinquent.

    Deposits

    Deposits increased $105.4 million to $1.7 billion at March 31, 2025 compared to March 31, 2024. Noninterest-bearing deposits decreased $5.7 million to $465.8 million at March 31, 2025 compared to March 31, 2024.  Core deposits increased $3.6 million with growth in money market accounts offsetting a decline in savings and NOW accounts. Core deposit gathering efforts remained focused on increasing the utilization of electronic (internet and mobile) deposit banking by our customers. Core deposits have remained stable at $1.2 billion over the past five quarters. Interest-bearing deposits increased $111.1 million from March 31, 2024 to March 31, 2025 due to growth in the time deposit portfolio of $50.6 million as customers sought a higher rate of interest. Brokered deposit balances increased $51.2 million to $177.0 million at March 31, 2025 as this funding source was utilized to supplement funding loan portfolio growth, while reducing the need to draw upon available borrowing lines. A campaign to attract time deposits with a maturity of five to twenty-four months commenced during the latter part of 2022 and has continued throughout 2024 and 2025.

    Shareholders’ Equity

    Shareholders’ equity increased $18.5 million to $212.0 million at March 31, 2025 compared to March 31, 2024.  Accumulated other comprehensive loss of $3.5 million at March 31, 2025 decreased from a loss of $9.2 million at March 31, 2024 as a result of a decrease in net unrealized loss on available for sale securities to $2.8 million at March 31, 2025 from a net unrealized loss of $6.4 million at March 31, 2024, coupled with a decrease in loss of $2.0 million in the defined benefit plan obligation. The current level of shareholders’ equity equates to a book value per share of $27.85 at March 31, 2025 compared to $25.72 at March 31, 2024, and an equity to asset ratio of 9.41% at March 31, 2025 and 8.76% at March 31, 2024. Tangible book value per share (a non-GAAP measure) increased to $25.67 at March 31, 2025 compared to $23.50 at March 31, 2024. Dividends declared for the three months ended March 31, 2025 and 2024 were $0.32 per share.

    Penns Woods Bancorp, Inc. is the parent company of Jersey Shore State Bank, which operates sixteen branch offices providing financial services in Lycoming, Clinton, Centre, Montour, Union, and Blair Counties, and Luzerne Bank, which operates eight branch offices providing financial services in Luzerne County, and United Insurance Solutions, LLC, which offers insurance products.  Investment and insurance products are offered through Jersey Shore State Bank’s subsidiary, The M Group, Inc. D/B/A The Comprehensive Financial Group.

    NOTE:  This press release contains financial information determined by methods other than in accordance with U.S. Generally Accepted Accounting Principles (“GAAP”).  Management uses the non-GAAP measure of net income from core operations in its analysis of the company’s performance. This measure, as used by the Company, adjusts net income determined in accordance with GAAP to exclude the effects of special items, including significant gains or losses that are unusual in nature such as net securities gains and losses. Because these certain items and their impact on the Company’s performance are difficult to predict, management believes presentation of financial measures excluding the impact of such items provides useful supplemental information in evaluating the operating results of the Company’s core businesses. These disclosures should not be viewed as a substitute for net income determined in accordance with GAAP, nor are they necessarily comparable to non-GAAP performance measures that may be presented by other companies.

    This press release may contain certain “forward-looking statements” including statements concerning plans, objectives, future events or performance and assumptions and other statements, which are statements other than statements of historical fact.  The Company cautions readers that the following important factors, among others, may have affected and could in the future affect actual results and could cause actual results for subsequent periods to differ materially from those expressed in any forward-looking statement made by or on behalf of the Company herein: (i) the effect of changes in laws and regulations, including federal and state banking laws and regulations, and the associated costs of compliance with such laws and regulations either currently or in the future as applicable; (ii) the effect of changes in accounting policies and practices, as may be adopted by the regulatory agencies as well as by the Financial Accounting Standards Board, or of changes in the Company’s organization, compensation and benefit plans; (iii) the effect on the Company’s competitive position within its market area of the increasing consolidation within the banking and financial services industries, including the increased competition from larger regional and out-of-state banking organizations as well as non-bank providers of various financial services; (iv) the effect of changes in interest rates; (v) the effects of health emergencies, including the spread of infectious diseases or pandemics; (vi) the effect of changes in the business cycle and downturns in the local, regional or national economies; or (vii) any potential adverse events or developments resulting from the merger agreement, dated December 16, 2024, between Penns Woods Bancorp, Inc. and Northwest Bancshares, Inc., including, without limitation, any event, change, or other circumstances that could give rise to the right of one or both of the parties to terminate the merger agreement or the possibility that the parties may be unable to achieve expected synergies and operating efficiencies in the merger within the expected timeframes or to successfully integrate the business and operations of Jersey Shore State Bank and Luzerne Bank with those of Northwest Savings Bank after closing.  For a list of other factors which could affect the Company’s results, see the Company’s filings with the Securities and Exchange Commission, including “Item 1A.  Risk Factors,” set forth in the Company’s Annual Report on Form 10-K for the fiscal year ended December 31, 2024.

    You should not place undue reliance on any forward-looking statements.  These statements speak only as of the date of this press release, even if subsequently made available by the Company on its website or otherwise.  The Company undertakes no obligation to update or revise these statements to reflect events or circumstances occurring after the date of this press release.

    Previous press releases and additional information can be obtained from the Company’s website at www.pwod.com.

    Contact: Richard A. Grafmyre, Chief Executive Officer
      110 Reynolds Street
      Williamsport, PA 17702
      570-322-1111 e-mail: pwod@pwod.com
    PENNS WOODS BANCORP, INC.
    CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEET
    (UNAUDITED)
     
        March 31,
    (In Thousands, Except Share and Per Share Data)     2025       2024     % Change
    ASSETS:            
    Noninterest-bearing cash   $ 26,604     $ 23,488     13.27 %
    Interest-bearing balances in other financial institutions     10,841       9,055     19.72 %
    Total cash and cash equivalents     37,445       32,543     15.06 %
                 
    Investment debt securities, available for sale, at fair value     175,721       187,245     (6.15 )%
    Investment equity securities, at fair value     1,128       1,112     1.44 %
    Restricted investment in bank stock     20,613       23,420     (11.99 )%
    Loans held for sale     2,583       3,360     (23.13 )%
    Loans     1,897,376       1,855,347     2.27 %
    Allowance for credit losses     (10,236 )     (11,542 )   (11.32 )%
    Loans, net     1,887,140       1,843,805     2.35 %
    Premises and equipment, net     27,441       28,970     (5.28 )%
    Accrued interest receivable     10,871       11,344     (4.17 )%
    Bank-owned life insurance     45,982       32,853     39.96 %
    Investment in limited partnerships     6,466       7,515     (13.96 )%
    Goodwill     16,450       16,450     %
    Intangibles     82       184     (55.43 )%
    Operating lease right of use asset     2,761       2,922     (5.51 )%
    Deferred tax asset     2,067       4,546     (54.53 )%
    Other assets     15,485       13,847     11.83 %
    TOTAL ASSETS   $ 2,252,235     $ 2,210,116     1.91 %
                 
    LIABILITIES:            
    Interest-bearing deposits   $ 1,258,188     $ 1,147,111     9.68 %
    Noninterest-bearing deposits     465,766       471,451     (1.21 )%
    Total deposits     1,723,954       1,618,562     6.51 %
                 
    Short-term borrowings     82,910       111,208     (25.45 )%
    Long-term borrowings     214,542       261,770     (18.04 )%
    Accrued interest payable     3,908       4,174     (6.37 )%
    Operating lease liability     2,841       2,987     (4.89 )%
    Other liabilities     12,057       17,898     (32.63 )%
    TOTAL LIABILITIES     2,040,212       2,016,599     1.17 %
                 
    SHAREHOLDERS’ EQUITY:            
    Preferred stock, no par value, 3,000,000 shares authorized; no shares issued               n/a
    Common stock, par value $5.55, 22,500,000 shares authorized; 8,124,439 and 8,035,597 shares issued; 7,614,214 and 7,525,372 shares outstanding     45,134       44,641     1.10 %
    Additional paid-in capital     62,931       62,215     1.15 %
    Retained earnings     120,261       108,642     10.69 %
    Accumulated other comprehensive loss:            
    Net unrealized loss on available for sale securities     (2,762 )     (6,425 )   57.01 %
    Defined benefit plan     (726 )     (2,741 )   73.51 %
    Treasury stock at cost, 510,225 shares     (12,815 )     (12,815 )   %
    TOTAL SHAREHOLDERS’ EQUITY     212,023       193,517     9.56 %
    TOTAL LIABILITIES AND SHAREHOLDERS’ EQUITY   $ 2,252,235     $ 2,210,116     1.91 %
    PENNS WOODS BANCORP, INC.
    CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF INCOME
    (UNAUDITED)
     
        Three Months Ended March 31,
    (In Thousands, Except Share and Per Share Data)     2025       2024     % Change
    INTEREST AND DIVIDEND INCOME:            
    Loans including fees   $ 26,014     $ 23,860     9.03 %
    Investment securities:            
    Taxable     1,723       1,594     8.09 %
    Tax-exempt     60       97     (38.14 )%
    Dividend and other interest income     581       679     (14.43 )%
    TOTAL INTEREST AND DIVIDEND INCOME     28,378       26,230     8.19 %
                 
    INTEREST EXPENSE:            
    Deposits     8,744       7,963     9.81 %
    Short-term borrowings     1,056       2,005     (47.33 )%
    Long-term borrowings     2,438       2,516     (3.10 )%
    TOTAL INTEREST EXPENSE     12,238       12,484     (1.97 )%
                 
    NET INTEREST INCOME     16,140       13,746     17.42 %
                 
    (RECOVERY) PROVISION FOR CREDIT LOSSES     (2,969 )     138     (2,251.45 )%
                 
    NET INTEREST INCOME AFTER (RECOVERY) PROVISION OF CREDIT LOSSES     19,109       13,608     40.42 %
                 
    NON-INTEREST INCOME:            
    Service charges     483       515     (6.21 )%
    Net debt securities gains (losses), available for sale     305       (23 )   1,426.09 %
    Net equity securities gains (losses)     17       (10 )   270.00 %
    Bank-owned life insurance     301       463     (34.99 )%
    Gain on sale of loans     408       305     33.77 %
    Insurance commissions     152       153     (0.65 )%
    Brokerage commissions     167       186     (10.22 )%
    Loan broker income     252       222     13.51 %
    Debit card income     308       329     (6.38 )%
    Other     175       322     (45.65 )%
    TOTAL NON-INTEREST INCOME     2,568       2,462     4.31 %
                 
    NON-INTEREST EXPENSE:            
    Salaries and employee benefits     6,483       6,422     0.95 %
    Occupancy     874       905     (3.43 )%
    Furniture and equipment     997       939     6.18 %
    Software amortization     419       190     120.53 %
    Pennsylvania shares tax     413       320     29.06 %
    Professional fees     505       552     (8.51 )%
    Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation deposit insurance     397       359     10.58 %
    Marketing     47       71     (33.80 )%
    Intangible amortization     25       26     (3.85 )%
    Merger expense     1,093           n/a
    Other     1,341       1,839     (27.08 )%
    TOTAL NON-INTEREST EXPENSE     12,594       11,623     8.35 %
    INCOME BEFORE INCOME TAX PROVISION     9,083       4,447     104.25 %
    INCOME TAX PROVISION     1,716       639     168.54 %
    NET INCOME AVAILABLE TO COMMON SHAREHOLDERS’   $ 7,367     $ 3,808     93.46 %
    EARNINGS PER SHARE – BASIC   $ 0.97     $ 0.51     90.20 %
    EARNINGS PER SHARE – DILUTED   $ 0.95     $ 0.51     86.27 %
    WEIGHTED AVERAGE SHARES OUTSTANDING – BASIC     7,589,592       7,512,520     1.03 %
    WEIGHTED AVERAGE SHARES OUTSTANDING – DILUTED     7,728,688       7,512,520     2.88 %
    PENNS WOODS BANCORP, INC.
    AVERAGE BALANCES AND INTEREST RATES 
    (UNAUDITED)
     
        Three Months Ended
        March 31, 2025   March 31, 2024
    (Dollars in Thousands)   Average 
    Balance (1)
      Interest   Average 
    Rate
      Average 
    Balance (1)
      Interest   Average 
    Rate
    ASSETS:                        
    Tax-exempt loans (3)   $ 68,615   $ 556   3.28 %   $ 69,349   $ 463   2.69 %
    All other loans     1,824,502     25,575   5.68 %     1,781,962     23,494   5.30 %
    Total loans (2)     1,893,117     26,131   5.60 %     1,851,311     23,957   5.20 %
                             
    Taxable securities     191,040     2,188   4.64 %     200,275     2,144   4.35 %
    Tax-exempt securities (3)     10,751     76   2.87 %     16,529     123   3.03 %
    Total securities     201,791     2,264   4.55 %     216,804     2,267   4.25 %
                             
    Interest-bearing balances in other financial institutions     14,699     116   3.20 %     10,199     129   5.09 %
                             
    Total interest-earning assets     2,109,607     28,511   5.48 %     2,078,314     26,353   5.10 %
                             
    Other assets     138,990             130,958        
                             
    TOTAL ASSETS   $ 2,248,597           $ 2,209,272        
                             
    LIABILITIES AND SHAREHOLDERS’ EQUITY:                        
    Savings   $ 209,025     234   0.45 %   $ 218,722     268   0.49 %
    Super Now deposits     208,537     904   1.76 %     215,870     1,084   2.02 %
    Money market deposits     317,306     2,468   3.15 %     292,707     2,359   3.24 %
    Time deposits     507,085     5,138   4.11 %     407,169     4,252   4.20 %
    Total interest-bearing deposits     1,241,953     8,744   2.86 %     1,134,468     7,963   2.82 %
                             
    Short-term borrowings     95,339     1,056   4.49 %     144,350     2,005   5.59 %
    Long-term borrowings     230,682     2,438   4.29 %     259,697     2,516   3.90 %
    Total borrowings     326,021     3,494   4.35 %     404,047     4,521   4.50 %
                             
    Total interest-bearing liabilities     1,567,974     12,238   3.17 %     1,538,515     12,484   3.26 %
                             
    Demand deposits     449,384             451,877        
    Other liabilities     31,524             29,260        
    Shareholders’ equity     199,715             189,620        
                             
    TOTAL LIABILITIES AND SHAREHOLDERS’ EQUITY   $ 2,248,597           $ 2,209,272        
    Interest rate spread (3)           2.31 %           1.84 %
    Net interest income/margin (3)       $ 16,273   3.13 %       $ 13,869   2.69 %
    1. Information on this table has been calculated using average daily balance sheets to obtain average balances.
    2. Non-accrual loans have been included with loans for the purpose of analyzing net interest earnings.
    3. Income and rates on fully taxable equivalent basis include an adjustment for the difference between annual income from tax-exempt obligations and the taxable equivalent of such income at the standard tax rate of 21%
      Three Months Ended March 31,
        2025     2024
    Total interest income $ 28,378   $ 26,230
    Total interest expense   12,238     12,484
    Net interest income (GAAP)   16,140     13,746
    Tax equivalent adjustment   133     123
    Net interest income (fully taxable equivalent) (non-GAAP) $ 16,273   $ 13,869
    (Dollars in Thousands, Except Per Share Data, Unaudited)   Quarter Ended
        3/31/2025   12/31/2024   9/30/2024   6/30/2024   3/31/2024
    Operating Data                    
    Net income   $ 7,367     $ 3,741     $ 4,801     $ 5,390     $ 3,808  
    Net interest income     16,140       15,563       15,056       14,515       13,746  
    (Recovery) provision for credit losses     (2,969 )     420       740       (1,177 )     138  
    Net security gains (losses)     322       (44 )     36       (19 )     (33 )
    Non-interest income, excluding net security gains (losses)     2,246       2,754       2,385       2,044       2,495  
    Non-interest expense     12,594       12,980       10,884       10,996       11,623  
                         
    Performance Statistics                    
    Net interest margin     3.13 %     2.98 %     2.88 %     2.83 %     2.69 %
    Annualized cost of total deposits     2.07 %     2.22 %     2.27 %     2.14 %     2.01 %
    Annualized non-interest income to average assets     0.46 %     0.48 %     0.43 %     0.37 %     0.45 %
    Annualized non-interest expense to average assets     2.24 %     2.32 %     1.95 %     1.98 %     2.10 %
    Annualized return on average assets     1.31 %     0.67 %     0.86 %     0.97 %     0.69 %
    Annualized return on average equity     14.76 %     7.28 %     9.60 %     11.12 %     8.03 %
    Annualized net loan (recoveries) charge-offs to average loans   (0.20 )%     0.05 %     0.07 %   (0.09 )%     0.08 %
    Net (recoveries) charge-offs     (957 )     228       328       (396 )     380  
    Efficiency ratio     68.36 %     70.73 %     62.26 %     66.25 %     71.41 %
                         
    Per Share Data                    
    Basic earnings per share   $ 0.97     $ 0.50     $ 0.64     $ 0.72     $ 0.51  
    Diluted earnings per share     0.95       0.49       0.64       0.72       0.51  
    Dividend declared per share     0.32       0.32       0.32       0.32       0.32  
    Book value     27.85       27.16       26.96       26.13       25.72  
    Tangible book value (Non-GAAP)     25.67       24.97       24.77       23.93       23.50  
    Common stock price:                    
    High     31.90       34.06       23.98       21.08       22.64  
    Low     27.61       23.74       19.29       17.17       18.44  
    Close     27.91       30.39       23.79       20.55       19.41  
    Weighted average common shares:                    
    Basic     7,590       7,555       7,544       7,529       7,513  
    Fully Diluted     7,729       7,693       7,544       7,529       7,513  
    End-of-period common shares:                    
    Issued     8,124       8,067       8,065       8,052       8,036  
    Treasury     (510 )     (510 )     (510 )     (510 )     (510 )
    (Dollars in Thousands, Unaudited)   Quarter Ended
        3/31/2025   12/31/2024   9/30/2024   6/30/2024   3/31/2024
    Financial Condition Data:                    
    General                    
    Total assets   $ 2,252,235     $ 2,232,338     $ 2,259,250     $ 2,234,617     $ 2,210,116  
    Loans, net     1,887,140       1,865,230       1,863,586       1,855,054       1,843,805  
    Goodwill     16,450       16,450       16,450       16,450       16,450  
    Intangibles     82       107       133       158       184  
    Total deposits     1,723,954       1,706,081       1,700,321       1,648,093       1,618,562  
    Noninterest-bearing     465,766       456,936       452,922       461,092       471,451  
    Savings     211,136       208,340       211,560       218,354       220,932  
    NOW     203,191       212,687       218,279       209,906       208,073  
    Money Market     323,869       308,977       321,614       320,101       299,916  
    Time Deposits     342,983       340,844       328,294       310,187       292,372  
    Brokered Deposits     177,009       178,297       167,652       128,453       125,818  
    Total interest-bearing deposits     1,258,188       1,249,145       1,247,399       1,187,001       1,147,111  
                         
    Core deposits*     1,203,962       1,186,940       1,204,375       1,209,453       1,200,372  
    Shareholders’ equity     212,023       205,231       203,694       197,087       193,517  
                         
    Asset Quality                    
    Non-performing loans   $ 9,987     $ 8,904     $ 7,940     $ 6,784     $ 7,958  
    Non-performing loans to total assets     0.44 %     0.40 %     0.35 %     0.30 %     0.36 %
    Allowance for credit losses on loans     10,236       11,848       11,588       11,234       11,542  
    Allowance for credit losses on loans to total loans     0.54 %     0.63 %     0.62 %     0.60 %     0.62 %
    Allowance for credit losses on loans to non-performing loans     102.49 %     133.06 %     145.94 %     165.60 %     145.04 %
    Non-performing loans to total loans     0.53 %     0.47 %     0.42 %     0.36 %     0.43 %
                         
    Capitalization                    
    Shareholders’ equity to total assets     9.41 %     9.19 %     9.02 %     8.82 %     8.76 %
                                             
    * Core deposits are defined as total deposits less time deposits and brokered deposits.
    Reconciliation of GAAP and Non-GAAP Financial Measures
    (UNAUDITED)
     
        Three Months Ended March 31,
    (Dollars in Thousands, Except Per Share Data, Unaudited)     2025       2024  
    GAAP net income   $ 7,367     $ 3,808  
    Net securities (gains) losses, net of tax     (254 )     26  
    Merger expenses, net of tax     948        
    Non-GAAP core earnings   $ 8,061     $ 3,834  
             
        Three Months Ended March 31,
          2025       2024  
    Return on average assets (ROA)     1.31 %     0.69 %
    Net securities (gains) losses, net of tax   (0.04 )%     %
    Merger expenses, net of tax     0.16 %     %
    Non-GAAP core ROA     1.43 %     0.69 %
             
        Three Months Ended March 31,
          2025       2024  
    Return on average equity (ROE)     14.76 %     8.03 %
    Net securities (gains) losses, net of tax   (0.51 )%     0.06 %
    Merger expenses, net of tax     1.90 %     %
    Non-GAAP core ROE     16.15 %     8.09 %
             
        Three Months Ended March 31,
          2025       2024  
    Basic earnings per share (EPS)   $ 0.97     $ 0.51  
    Net securities (gains) losses, net of tax     (0.03 )      
    Merger expenses, net of tax     0.12        
    Non-GAAP basic core EPS   $ 1.06     $ 0.51  
         
        Three Months Ended March 31,
          2025       2024  
    Diluted EPS   $ 0.95     $ 0.51  
    Net securities (gains) losses, net of tax     (0.03 )      
    Merger expenses, net of tax     0.12        
    Non-GAAP diluted core EPS   $ 1.04     $ 0.51  
    (Dollars in Thousands, Except Share and Per Share Data, Unaudited)   Quarter Ended
        3/31/2025   12/31/2024   9/30/2024   6/30/2024   3/31/2024
    Total shareholders’ equity   $ 212,023     $ 205,231     $ 203,694     $ 197,087     $ 193,517  
    Goodwill     (16,450 )     (16,450 )     (16,450 )     (16,450 )     (16,450 )
    Intangibles     (82 )     (107 )     (133 )     (158 )     (184 )
    Tangible shareholders’ equity   $ 195,491     $ 188,674     $ 187,111     $ 180,479     $ 176,883  
                         
    Shares outstanding     7,614,214       7,556,743       7,554,488       7,541,474       7,525,372  
                         
    Book value per share   $ 27.85     $ 27.16     $ 26.96     $ 26.13     $ 25.72  
    Tangible book value per share (Non-GAAP)   $ 25.67     $ 24.97     $ 24.77     $ 23.93     $ 23.50  

    The MIL Network

  • MIL-OSI: SiriusPoint Welcomes AM Best Outlook Revision to ‘Positive’ from ‘Stable’

    Source: GlobeNewswire (MIL-OSI)

    HAMILTON, Bermuda, April 25, 2025 (GLOBE NEWSWIRE) — AM Best has revised the outlook of the rated operating subsidiaries of SiriusPoint Ltd (“SiriusPoint” or “the Company”) (Bermuda) [NYSE: SPNT] to Positive from Stable, citing the Company’s “very strong balance sheet”.

    AM Best has affirmed the Financial Strength Rating of A- (Excellent) and the Long-Term Issuer Credit Ratings (Long-Term ICR) of “a-” (Excellent) of SiriusPoint’s rated operating subsidiaries. Additionally, the rating agency has affirmed the Long-Term ICR of “bbb-” (Good) of SiriusPoint.

    AM Best said the revision of the outlook to Positive from Stable reflects SiriusPoint’s improved balance sheet strength following actions taken by management including the derisking of the investment portfolio, reduction in catastrophe exposure, and the recent buy-back of shares and warrants previously held by CM Bermuda Ltd.

    “This outlook revision is a reflection of our journey towards stability, underwriting profitability, and becoming a best-in-class insurer and reinsurer,” said Scott Egan, Chief Executive Officer of SiriusPoint. “This is further recognition of SiriusPoint’s achievements and the work we have done to reshape our future. I am proud of the team at SiriusPoint who have worked with dedication and commitment to improve our company profile, balance sheet strength, and underwriting performance.”

    In a press release issued today, AM Best said: “The ratings reflect SiriusPoint’s consolidated balance sheet strength, which AM Best assesses as very strong, as well as its adequate operating performance, neutral business profile and appropriate enterprise risk management.”

    The rating agency added: “AM Best expects that the group will maintain its risk-adjusted capitalization comfortably at the strongest level, as measured by Best’s Capital Adequacy Ratio (BCAR), supported by prudent capital management, effective underwriting exposure management and positive operating results.”

    The financial strength rating of A- (Excellent) and the Long-Term ICRs of “a-” (Excellent) have been affirmed with the outlooks revised to positive from stable for the following subsidiaries of SiriusPoint:

    • SiriusPoint America Insurance Company
    • SiriusPoint Bermuda Insurance Company Ltd.
    • SiriusPoint International Insurance Corporation (publ)
    • SiriusPoint Specialty Insurance Corporation

    AM Best’s revised outlook for SiriusPoint comes just one month after Fitch Ratings announced it had affirmed the ratings of SiriusPoint, including its Long-Term Issuer Default Rating at ‘BBB’, its senior debt rating at ‘BBB-‘ and its Insurer Financial Strength (IFS) rating at ‘A-‘ (Strong) of SiriusPoint’s subsidiaries. It has also revised the Company’s Outlook to Positive from Stable.

    Click here for full details in AM Best’s press release.

    Contacts

    Investor Relations
    Liam Blackledge, SiriusPoint
    Liam.Blackledge@siriuspt.com
    +44 203 772 3082

    Media
    Sarah Hills, Rein4ce
    sarah.hills@rein4ce.co.uk
    +44 7718 882011

    About SiriusPoint

    SiriusPoint is a global underwriter of insurance and reinsurance providing solutions to clients and brokers around the world. Bermuda-headquartered with offices in New York, London, Stockholm and other locations, we are listed on the New York Stock Exchange (SPNT). We have licenses to write Property & Casualty and Accident & Health insurance and reinsurance globally. Our offering and distribution capabilities are strengthened by a portfolio of strategic partnerships with Managing General Agents and Program Administrators within our Insurance & Services segment. With over $2.6 billion total capital, SiriusPoint’s operating companies have a financial strength rating of A- (Excellent) from AM Best, S&P and Fitch, and A3 from Moody’s.

    FORWARD-LOOKING STATEMENTS

    We make statements in this press release that are forward-looking statements within the meaning of the U.S. federal securities laws. We intend these forward-looking statements to be covered by the safe harbor provisions for forward-looking statements in the U.S. federal securities laws. These statements involve risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from those contained in the forward-looking statements. These risks and uncertainties include, but are not limited to, the impact of general economic conditions and conditions affecting the insurance and reinsurance industry; the adequacy of our reserves; fluctuation in the results of operations; pandemic or other catastrophic event; uncertainty of success in investing in early-stage companies, such as the risk of loss of an initial investment, highly variable returns on investments, delay in receiving return on investment and difficulty in liquidating the investment; our ability to assess underwriting risk, trends in rates for property and casualty insurance and reinsurance, competition, investment market and investment income fluctuations; trends in insured and paid losses; regulatory and legal uncertainties; and other risk factors described in SiriusPoint’s Annual Report on Form 10-K for the period ended December 31, 2024.

    Except as required by applicable law or regulation, we disclaim any obligation to publicly update or revise any forward-looking statement to reflect changes in underlying assumptions or factors, or new information, data or methods, future events, or other circumstances after the date of this press release.

    The MIL Network

  • MIL-OSI Security: Pontiac Man Pleads Guilty in $4 Million Identity Theft and Unemployment Fraud Case

    Source: Federal Bureau of Investigation (FBI) State Crime News

    DETROIT – A Pontiac man has pleaded guilty to committing aggravated identity theft and wire fraud as part of large-scale, multi-state Unemployment Insurance benefit fraud scheme in which he and co-conspirators fraudulently obtained debit cards loaded with more than $4 million in Pandemic Unemployment Assistance funds, Acting United States Attorney Julie A. Beck announced today.

    Joining in the announcement were Megan Howell, Acting Special Agent-in-Charge, Chicago Region, U.S. Department of Labor, Office of Inspector General, Special Agent-in-Charge Cheyvoryea Gibson, Federal Bureau of Investigation, Detroit Division, Charles Miller, Special Agent-in-Charge, Internal Revenue Service – Criminal Investigations, Douglas Zloto, Special Agent-in-Charge, U.S. Secret Service, Sean McStravick, Acting Inspector-in-Charge, U.S. Postal Service, Office of Inspector General, and Director Jason Palmer, State of Michigan Unemployment Insurance Agency.

    Terrance Calhoun, Jr., 36, of Pontiac, Michigan, pleaded guilty to committing aggravated identity theft, wire fraud, conspiracy to commit wire fraud, and to possessing 15 or more unauthorized access devices, all in relation to acts of unemployment insurance fraud.

    According to his plea agreement, Calhoun Jr., and others, used stolen personal identification and filed hundreds of false unemployment claims with state unemployment insurance agencies in Michigan, Arizona, and Maryland over a six-month period in the names of other individuals without their knowledge or consent. Those false claims resulted in hundreds of debit cards loaded with over $4 million in unemployment insurance funds being mailed to addresses controlled by Calhoun Jr. and his co-conspirators. Roughly $1.6 million dollars in purchases and cash withdrawals were then successfully made from the cards.

    As described within a prior complaint, when agents executed search warrants at the principal mailing addresses used for the fraudulent unemployment insurance benefit claims, including the residence of Calhoun Jr., agents seized numerous documents containing the personal identification information of other individuals, multiple debit cards in the names of numerous other individuals, and firearms.

    Calhoun now faces a possible sentence of up to 20-years’ imprisonment for each of the wire fraud counts to which he has pleaded guilty, a possible sentence of up to 10-years’ imprisonment for possessing 15 or more unauthorized access devices, and a mandatorily consecutive 2-year sentence for the aggravated identity theft charge to which he has pleaded guilty.

    Sentencing is set for August 27, 2025 before United States District Court Judge Judith E. Levy.

    “Taxpayer money diverted into the pockets of criminals means less money going to Michiganders who actually need help getting through difficult financial times and who follow the rules when seeking assistance,” said Acting US Attorney Beck.  “These charges reflect our office’s ongoing commitment to the community by investigating such schemes and bringing those who commit these crimes to justice.”

    “Terrance Calhoun Jr and his co-conspirators engaged in a scheme to defraud state workforce agencies in Michigan, Arizona, and Maryland by filing hundreds of fraudulent unemployment insurance (UI) claims.  As a result, Calhoun enriched himself by stealing taxpayer resources intended for unemployed American workers.  We will continue to work with our law enforcement partners to protect the integrity of the UI program from those who seek to exploit it,” said Megan Howell, Acting Special Agent-in-Charge, Great Lakes Region, U.S. Department of Labor, Office of Inspector General.

    “Individuals who commit identity theft and unemployment insurance fraud of this magnitude deserve to be punished to the fullest extent of the law,” said Charles Miller, Special Agent in Charge, Detroit Field Office, IRS Criminal Investigation (IRS-CI).  “Terrance Calhoun, Jr. and Jermaine Arnett demonstrated a blatant disregard of the integrity of the multiple states’ unemployment insurance systems and caused immeasurable hardship to innocent victims. IRS-CI remains committed to the pursuit of identity theft and financial fraud, and together with our partners at the U.S. Attorney’s Office, we will hold those who engage in similar crimes accountable.”

    “The FBI in Michigan, alongside our law enforcement partners, remains steadfast in protecting the community and investigating individuals who violate federal law,” said Cheyvoryea Gibson, Special Agent in Charge of the FBI Detroit Field Office. “Today’s guilty plea by Terrance Calhoun, whose involvement in a multi-state fraud scheme, is a clear reminder that bad actors will be stopped, and we will ensure integrity will prevail.”

    The case was jointly investigated by agents from the Department of Labor Office of the Inspector General, the Internal Revenue Service – Criminal Investigations Division, the Federal Bureau of Investigation, the Bureau of Immigration and Customs Enforcement, the United States Secret Service, the United States Postal Service Office of the Inspector General, and the State of Michigan -Unemployment Insurance Agency. The case is being prosecuted by Assistant United States Attorneys Carl D. Gilmer-Hill and Jessica A. Nathan.

    MIL Security OSI

  • MIL-OSI Russia: GUU at a meeting at AFK Sistema: joint promotion of scientific projects

    Translation. Region: Russian Federal

    Source: State University of Management – Official website of the State –

    On April 23, representatives of the State University of Management took part in an open dialogue on the topic of “Systemic communications: features of promoting innovative, knowledge-intensive and socially significant projects”, which was held at the head office of AFK Sistema

    The meeting with the executive vice president for public relations of AFK Sistema Sergey Kopytov brought together representatives of Lomonosov Moscow State University, RUDN University, HSE, RANEPA, Moscow Polytechnic University, State University of Management, Moscow State Institute of Culture, as well as the First Student Agency, a youth media outlet.

    The following took part from the State University of Management: Head of the Department for Coordination of Scientific Research Maxim Pletnev, Director of the Business Incubator Dmitry Rogov, Junior Researcher of the Department for Coordination of Scientific Research Anna Sotnikova and Analyst of the Center for Intellectual Property and Technology Transfer Anna Grishkina.

    During the meeting, the Head of the Corporate Communications Department of AFK Sistema shared practical cases. In particular, he spoke about covering the corporation’s contribution to the fight against the COVID-19 pandemic and the formation of a high-tech pharmaceutical holding, information support for the IPO of forestry and microelectronic assets, as well as about the promotion of AFK Sistema Group projects that shape the technological future of the country in such areas as: hydrogen and satellite technologies, computer vision and microchip production, the creation of electric river vessels and charging infrastructure for electric vehicles.

    The event was a continuation of the educational project implemented by the Sistema Charitable Foundation together with industrial partners from among the country’s leading high-tech companies as part of the Decade of Science and Technology in Russia. The project, which started in March 2025 at the R site

    Subscribe to the TG channel “Our GUU” Date of publication: 04/25/2025

    Please note: This information is raw content directly from the source of the information. It is exactly what the source states and does not reflect the position of MIL-OSI or its clients.

    MIL OSI Russia News

  • MIL-OSI United Kingdom: Career Insight: Joe, Trainee Solicitor, HMRC

    Source: United Kingdom – Executive Government & Departments

    Case study

    Career Insight: Joe, Trainee Solicitor, HMRC

    Joe provides an insight into his training within HM Revenue & Customs

    I am a fourth seat trainee in HM Revenue & Customs (HMRC) Legal Group’s European and International Law advisory team. The team advises on, drafts and helps negotiate a range of international agreements, including Free-Trade Agreements and Double Taxation Treaties.

    I studied Philosophy and Politics as my undergraduate degree, focussing my studies on human rights and the regulation of transnational enterprises. I suspected that a career in law was the best opportunity to apply these interests in practice; however, as a non-law graduate I was reluctant to immediately volunteer for the expense and stress of two more years of study in the form of the GDL and LPC. So, after graduating, I moved abroad to pursue a career playing and coaching rugby; the COVID-19 pandemic put paid to that ambition but provided me the opportunity to start an online law conversion.

     I applied for the role at HMRC as I thought that first-hand experience of the legislative process and regular precedent-setting litigation would provide a great opportunity to develop my career as a solicitor; but also because the tax arena seemed to offer a lot of variety, encompassing my interests in both public law and commercial questions.

    All trainees start in litigation for their first year; trainee solicitors remain within HMRC, while pupil barristers spend six months seconded to Chambers. My first seat was in VAT litigation, so after three years of intensive study, I arrived at HMRC braced for mountains of paperwork and long days of dense tax calculations. Instead, waiting on my desk were various packets of lentil-based snacks and the deceptively knotty legal question; are these crisps, or at least similar to crisps? I spent the seat thinking about other such questions, like what distinguishes cosmetic surgery from medical care. During this seat, I visited the Supreme Court assisting a senior lawyer and saw my own case feature in national newspapers.

    For my second seat I applied for HMRC’s Enforcement and Illicit Finance litigation Team. The question for this team was less frequently whether someone owes tax, but how HMRC can actually collect it from them. My tasks ranged from advocating on HMRC’s behalf in the Magistrates Court to instructing counsel at fast pace on High Court proceedings, attending the Court of Appeal and working with international law enforcement to seize overseas assets.

     As a trainee you will be given your own cases to run as part of a cross-HMRC case team with tax and policy experts, so you can stretch yourself in an environment surrounded by expert lawyers and tax professionals, who are all very generous with their time. Your role is to co-ordinate this team and ask the right questions to tease the legal arguments out of your clients. In this respect the skills I developed playing team sports were as important as my legal knowledge.  

    In your second year you move into an advisory team. In my first six months I worked on a mix of human rights and technical tax advice as part of the Personal Tax and Welfare team. I drafted my statutory instrument, which was a particular highlight, and fed into a major budget measure. It can feel like a drastic transition from the more adversarial world of litigation, but the training is extensive with HMRC running internal induction courses alongside the wider GLP offering.

    The advisory lawyers cover a wide variety of tasks, with my final seat feeling like an entirely new role.  I didn’t study EU or International Law as part of my law conversion, but having the lawyers who drafted the treaties sat next to you in the office is always a good starting point!

    Whilst the HMRC training contract will be of particular interest for anyone who wants a career in public law, I think it is really important to understand the breadth of the department’s work. There is regular precedent setting litigation with engages questions of employment and commercial law, and advisory teams that span the breadth of civil and criminal practice.

    Updates to this page

    Published 24 April 2025

    MIL OSI United Kingdom

  • MIL-OSI Europe: Immunisation prevents diseases and protects lives

    Source: European Union 2

    European Immunization Week is an initiative led by the World Health Organization (WHO) to raise awareness about the vital role immunisation plays to prevent diseases and protect life. This year’s EIW runs from 27 April to 3 May. 

    Vaccination is not only an act of self-protection but also one of solidarity, and one which  offers both immediate and long-term benefits, even if they might not be visible directly: vaccines protect individuals from potentially serious diseases and in the long run also protect others by reducing spread of infections. That way, vaccination is not only an act of self-protection but also one of solidarity. Without widespread vaccination, many diseases that are now rare thanks to vaccines, could return. 

    Successful vaccination programmes are built on understanding and responding to people’s beliefs, concerns, and expectations, and large parts of the population in European Union and European Economic Area (EU/EEA) countries follow the national vaccine recommendations in their countries.  

    However, in 2023 and 2024, case reports of diseases such as measles and pertussis surged following a period of low transmission during the COVID-19 pandemic. Routine childhood vaccination coverage, particularly for measles, remains below the recommended threshold in several countries. 

    In this context, social and behavioural science approaches can help identify and address barriers to vaccination and improve uptake in populations with lower coverage rates through tailored interventions. With this in mind, ECDC has published a set of operational tools that incorporate the latest social and behavioural science approaches and are provided in usable and adaptable formats that fit the real-life contexts of public health authorities and vaccination programmes. 

    Key recommendations to close the vaccination gaps include: 

    • Analysis of epidemiological trends, such as vaccination coverage by age, gender, geographical location, and education level.
    • Understanding the social and behavioural barriers and facilitators to vaccination that influence whether people accept, delay, or refuse vaccines so that targeted strategies and interventions can be implemented. 

    Join our digital event bridging epidemiology and social sciences to identify, understand and find joint solutions to address barriers against vaccination, close immunity gaps and improve vaccination coverage across the EU/EEA. 
     

    MIL OSI Europe News

  • MIL-OSI Global: Florida, once considered a swing state, is firmly Republican – a social anthropologist explains what caused this shift

    Source: The Conversation – USA – By Alexander Lowie, Postdoctoral associate in Classical and Civic Education, University of Florida

    Florida has attracted new residents since the pandemic, as well as a growth in conservative politics. iStock / Getty Images Plus

    Florida has undergone a dramatic political transformation over the past decade from a swing state to Republican stronghold.

    Florida’s recent congressional special election on April 1, 2025, showcased the state’s increasingly conservative identity, when Republicans won both congressional seats.

    Still, Democrats felt hopeful about these results, since the two Democratic contenders lost by slimmer margins in the 1st and 6th districts than in other recent elections.

    As a political anthropologist who has conducted fieldwork in central Florida, I’ve spent over five years tracking the growth of conservative political groups like the Proud Boys and Moms for Liberty, whose leaderships are based in Florida.

    I’ve seen firsthand how conservative activist networks and the growth of culture war politics, among other factors, have reshaped Florida’s political identity.

    Florida’s Republican state Sen. Randy Fine holds a victory party on April 1, 2025, in Ormond Beach, Fla.
    Joe Raedle/Getty Images

    The state that stopped swinging

    Although political strategists have historically considered Florida a swing state in presidential elections, it has consistently voted Republican since 1948.

    It has only voted for Democratic presidential candidates five times since 1964, for Lyndon B. Johnson, Jimmy Carter, Bill Clinton and twice for Barack Obama. President Donald Trump has won Florida three times in a row, most recently winning the 2024 election in all but six of Florida’s 67 counties.

    The main battleground since 2000 has been the I-4 Corridor, which connects Tampa, Orlando and Daytona. In 2000, President George W. Bush won the corridor by 4,400 votes. Since Bush only won Florida by 537 votes, and thus the presidency, the area became a top priority for both political parties.

    Some Democrats have said Florida’s political evolution happened gradually and then all at once.

    In 2012, there were almost 1.5 million more registered Democratic voters than Republicans in Florida. In 2020, Democrats’ advantage dropped to about 97,000. And by September 2024, there were almost 1 million more registered Republicans than Democrats.

    Steve Schale, the head of Obama’s 2008 campaign in Florida, argues that this shift happened because the Democratic Party lost the support of some white voters.

    Republicans have also actively courted Hispanic voters, while Democrats falsely believed that young Hispanics would inherently lean toward their party.

    This assumption has hurt the Democratic cause because, for example, some Hispanic voters in Florida, like many Cuban Americans, have long favored Republican. In fact, Trump performed so well with Hispanics in Florida in 2024 that it was the only state in which he received more of the Hispanic vote than Kamala Harris.

    State-level conservative success

    Florida has also had a Republican governor since 1998, a state Senate Republican majority since 1995 and a state House majority since 1997. This Republican dominance has only grown since Trump’s 2016 election.

    In 2018, Florida Governor Ron DeSantis received Trump’s endorsement and went from being relatively unknown in the gubernatorial primaries to the Republican nominee. He ultimately assumed office in 2019.

    Since then, DeSantis has successfully passed a slew of laws and policies reflecting the conservative values of what he saw as the new Floridian electorate.

    For example, DeSantis passed a six-week abortion ban measure into law in 2023.

    With DeSantis’ approval, Florida’s state Legislature also blocked diversity, equity and inclusion programs in state colleges in 2023 and banned lessons on sexual orientation and gender identity for public grade school students that same year.

    In 2023, the Florida governor also signed a law that allowed people to carry concealed weapons without a permit.

    The pandemic factor

    Some conservative political pundits and DeSantis supporters say that the governor’s COVID-19 policies are among the factors that have attracted newcomers to the state.

    Almost 300,000 people moved from out of state to Florida between April 2020 and April 2021, equal to roughly 903 people relocating to the state each day.

    The governor ordered Floridians to stay at home during April 2020, but many of his restrictions were lifted at the end of the month.

    DeSantis did not enforce mask mandates, vaccine requirements and other measures that were common in other states.

    During my fieldwork in Florida from 2022 through 2024, I met multiple people who moved to rural parts of the state because they did not want their lives to be severely restricted during the pandemic.

    One man in his early 50s stated, “During COVID my wife and I realized how screwed we were if things got really bad. We hated the lockdowns and got scared about not having enough food. If things got really bad, we didn’t want to trust other people, we wanted to be self-sufficient. So, we decided to get a place in the middle of the woods, on our own property, that we could go to if everything went to hell.”

    This couple settled on moving from out of state to a rural area of Florida, where they thought they had the best chance of avoiding future lockdown restrictions.

    DeSantis’ policy successes and his “freedom first” response to the pandemic have been celebrated by conservatives nationally.

    Moms for Liberty members in Viera, Fla., protest student face mask mandates in 2023.
    Paul Hennessy/SOPA Images/LightRocket via Gety Images

    Florida’s home for the alt-right

    As Florida lawmakers have continued to push conservative policies since the pandemic, Florida-based activist groups like Moms for Liberty have mobilized to support and expand them.

    Moms for Liberty was founded in 2021 by three Florida former school board members who opposed COVID-19 regulations during the pandemic.

    Moms for Liberty is headquartered in Melbourne, Florida, and is focused on reshaping public school curriculum to exclude what its members see as “woke” themes, like sexual orientation.

    The group lobbied for the 2022 Parental Rights in Education Act and the Stop-Woke Act, referred to by critics as the “Don’t Say Gay” law. This law restricts Florida classrooms from teaching kids in kindergarten through third grade about sexual orientation and gender identity, and also limits instruction on these subjects in higher grades.

    Florida has increasingly become a stronghold for other kinds of political activists, some of whom were instrumental in the Capitol riots on Jan. 6, 2021. Florida was home to 11.5% of the 716 people who were initially charged with participating in the Capitol riots.

    The most notable of these Jan. 6 arrests is Enrique Tarrio, a Miami native who has served as the symbolic leader of the Proud Boys, an alt-right “Western chauvinist” group.

    Alt-right activists are a minority of Florida’s conservative population. In my fieldwork, I have spoken to many Florida conservatives who did not identify with the Proud Boys or other alt-right groups – but were still sympathetic to many of their populist and conservative causes.

    No longer in play?

    Florida is now a major Republican stronghold with Floridians becoming increasingly prominent in national politics. Trump’s Cabinet has 23 people – 16 of them are connected to Florida.

    These include Secretary of State Marco Rubio, who served as a senator in Florida, and Attorney General Pam Bondi, who served as Florida’s state attorney general.

    Though some Democrats may feel optimistic about the special election results, they have lost the Sunshine State, at least for now.

    Alexander Lowie does not work for, consult, own shares in or receive funding from any company or organization that would benefit from this article, and has disclosed no relevant affiliations beyond their academic appointment.

    ref. Florida, once considered a swing state, is firmly Republican – a social anthropologist explains what caused this shift – https://theconversation.com/florida-once-considered-a-swing-state-is-firmly-republican-a-social-anthropologist-explains-what-caused-this-shift-253905

    MIL OSI – Global Reports

  • MIL-OSI Europe: REPORT on a revamped long-term budget for the Union in a changing world – A10-0076/2025

    Source: European Parliament 2

    MOTION FOR A EUROPEAN PARLIAMENT RESOLUTION

    on a revamped long-term budget for the Union in a changing world

    (2024/2051(INI))

     

    The European Parliament,

     having regard to Articles 311, 312, 323 and 324 of the Treaty on the Functioning of the European Union (TFEU),

     having regard to Council Regulation (EU, Euratom) 2020/2093 of 17 December 2020 laying down the multiannual financial framework for the years 2021 to 2027[1] and to the joint declarations agreed between Parliament, the Council and the Commission in this context and the related unilateral declarations,

     having regard to Council Decision (EU, Euratom) 2020/2053 of 14 December 2020 on the system of own resources of the European Union and repealing Decision 2014/335/EU, Euratom[2],

     having regard to the amended Commission proposal of 23 June 2023 for a Council decision amending Decision (EU, Euratom) 2020/2053 on the system of own resources of the European Union (COM(2023)0331),

     having regard to the Interinstitutional Agreement of 16 December 2020 between the European Parliament, the Council of the European Union and the European Commission on budgetary discipline, on cooperation in budgetary matters and on sound financial management, as well as on new own resources, including a roadmap towards the introduction of new own resources[3] (the IIA),

     having regard to Regulation (EU, Euratom) 2024/2509 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 23 September 2024 on the financial rules applicable to the general budget of the Union (recast)[4] (the Financial Regulation),

     having regard to Regulation (EU, Euratom) 2020/2092 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 16 December 2020 on a general regime of conditionality for the protection of the Union budget[5] (the Rule of Law Conditionality Regulation),

     having regard to its position of 27 February 2024 on the draft Council regulation amending Regulation (EU, Euratom) 2020/2093 laying down the multiannual financial framework for the years 2021 to 2027[6],

     having regard to its resolution of 10 May 2023 on own resources: a new start for EU finances, a new start for Europe[7],

     having regard to its resolution of 15 December 2022 on upscaling the 2021-2027 multiannual financial framework: a resilient EU budget fit for new challenges[8],

     having regard to its position of 16 December 2020 on the draft Council regulation laying down the multiannual financial framework for the years 2021 to 2027[9],

     having regard to the Interinstitutional Proclamation on the European Pillar of Social Rights of 13 December 2017[10] and to the Commission Action Plan of 4 March 2021 on the implementation of the European Pillar of Social Rights (COM(2021)0102),

     having regard to the Agreement adopted at the 15th Conference of the Parties to the Convention on Biological Diversity (COP 15) in Montreal on 19 December 2022 (Kunming-Montreal Global Biodiversity Framework),

     having regard to the Agreement adopted at the 21st Conference of the Parties to the UNFCCC (COP 21) in Paris on 12 December 2015 (the Paris Agreement),

     having regard to the United Nations Sustainable Development Goals,

     having regard to the report of 30 October 2024 by Sauli Niinistö entitled ‘Safer together – strengthening Europe’s civilian and military preparedness and readiness’ (the Niinistö report),

     having regard to the report of 9 September 2024 by Mario Draghi entitled ‘The future of European competitiveness’ (the Draghi report),

     having regard to the report of 4 September 2024 of the Strategic Dialogue on the Future of EU Agriculture entitled ‘A shared prospect for farming and food in Europe’,

     having regard to the report of 17 April 2024 by Enrico Letta entitled ‘Much more than a market – speed, security, solidarity: empowering the Single Market to deliver a sustainable future and prosperity for all EU Citizens’ (the Letta report),

     having regard to the report of 20 February 2024 of the High-Level Group on the Future of Cohesion Policy entitled ‘Forging a sustainable future together – cohesion for a competitive and inclusive Europe’,

     having regard to the Budapest Declaration on the New European Competitiveness Deal,

     having regard to the joint communication of 26 March 2025 entitled ‘European Preparedness Union Strategy’ (JOIN(2025)0130),

     having regard to the joint white paper of 19 March 2025 entitled ‘European Defence Readiness 2030’ (JOIN(2025)0120),

     having regard to the Commission communication of 7 March 2025 entitled ‘A Roadmap for Women’s Rights’ (COM(2025)0097),

     having regard to the Commission communication of 26 February 2025 entitled ‘The Clean Industrial Deal: a joint roadmap for competitiveness and decarbonisation’ (COM(2025)0085),

     having regard to the Commission communication of 19 February 2025 entitled ‘A Vision for Agriculture and Food’ (COM(2025)0075),

     having regard to the Commission communication of 11 February 2025 entitled ‘The road to the next multiannual financial framework’ (COM(2025)0046),

     having regard to the Commission communication of 29 January 2025 entitled ‘A Competitiveness Compass for the EU’ (COM(2025)0030),

     having regard to the Commission communication of 9 December 2021 entitled ‘Building an economy that works for people: an action plan for the social economy’ (COM(2021)0778),

     having regard to the European Council conclusions of 20 March 2025, 6 March 2025 and 19 December 2024,

     having regard to the political guidelines of 18 July 2024 for the next European Commission 2024-2029,

     having regard to the opinion of the Committee of the Regions of 20 November 2024 entitled ‘EU budget and place-based policies: proposals for new design and delivery mechanisms in the MFF post-2027’[11],

     having regard to Rule 55 of its Rules of Procedure,

     having regard to the opinions of the Committee on Foreign Affairs, the Committee on Development, the Committee on Budgetary Control, the Committee on Economic and Monetary Affairs, the Committee on Employment and Social Affairs, the Committee on the Environment, Climate and Food Safety, the Committee on Industry, Research and Energy, the Committee on Internal Market and Consumer Protection, the Committee on Transport and Tourism, the Committee on Regional Development, the Committee on Agriculture and Rural Development, the Committee on Culture and Education, the Committee on Civil Liberties, Justice and Home Affairs, the Committee on Constitutional Affairs, and the Committee on Women’s Rights and Gender Equality,

     having regard to the report of the Committee on Budgets (A10-0076/2025),

    A. whereas, under Article 311 TFEU, the Union is required to provide itself with the means necessary to attain its objectives and carry through its policies;

    B. whereas the Union budget is primarily an investment tool that can achieve economies of scale unattainable at Member State level and support European public goods, in particular through cross-border projects; whereas all spending through the Union budget must provide European added value and deliver discernible net benefits compared to spending at national or sub-national level, leading to real and lasting results;

    C. whereas spending through the Union budget, if effectively targeted, aligned with the Union’s political priorities and better coordinated with spending at national level, helps to avoid fragmentation in the single market, promote upwards convergence, decrease inequalities and boost the overall impact of public investment; whereas public investment is essential as a catalyst for private investment in sectors where the market alone cannot drive the required investment;

    D. whereas the NextGenerationEU recovery instrument (NGEU) established in the wake of the COVID-19 pandemic enabled significant additional investment capacity of EUR 750 billion in 2018 prices – beyond the Union budget, which amounts to 1.1 % of the EU-27’s gross national income (GNI) – prompting a swift recovery and return to growth and supporting the green and digital transitions; whereas NGEU will not be in place post-2027;

    E.  whereas in 2022 Member States spent an average of 1.4 % of gross domestic product (GDP) on State aid – significantly more than their contribution to the Union budget – with over half of the State aid unrelated to crises;

    F. whereas the Union budget, bolstered by NGEU and loans through the SURE scheme, has been instrumental in alleviating the economic and social impact of the COVID-19 crisis and in responding to the effects of Russia’s war of aggression against Ukraine; whereas the Union budget remains ill-equipped, in terms of size, structure and rules, to fully play its role in adjusting to evolving spending needs, addressing shocks and responding to crises and giving practical effect to the principle of solidarity, and to enable the Union to fulfil its objectives as established under the Treaties;

    G. whereas people rightly expect more from the Union and its budget, including the capacity to respond quickly and effectively to evolving needs and to provide them with the necessary support, especially in times of crisis;

    H. whereas, since the adoption of the current multiannual financial framework (MFF), the political, economic and social context has changed beyond recognition, compounding underlying structural challenges for the Union and leading to a substantial revision of the MFF in 2024;

    I. whereas the context in which the Commission will prepare its proposals for the post-2027 MFF is every bit as challenging, with the established global and geopolitical order changing quickly and radically, the return of large-scale warfare in the Union’s immediate neighbourhood, a highly challenging economic and social backdrop and the worsening climate and biodiversity crisis; whereas, as the Commission has made clear, the status quo is not an option and the Union budget will need to change accordingly;

    J. whereas the US administration has decided to retreat from the country’s post-war global role in guaranteeing peace and security, in leading on global governance in the rules-based, multilateral international order and in providing essential development and humanitarian aid to those most in need around the world; whereas the Union will therefore have to step up to fill part of the void the US appears set to leave, placing additional demands on the budget;

    K. whereas the Union has committed to take all the steps needed to achieve climate neutrality by 2050 at the latest and to protect nature and reverse biodiversity loss; whereas delivering on the policy framework put in place to achieve this objective will require substantial investment; whereas the Union budget will have to play a key role in providing and incentivising that investment;

    L. whereas, in order to compensate for the budget’s shortcomings, there have been numerous workaround solutions that make the budget more opaque, leaving the public in the dark about the real volume of Union spending, undermining the longer-term predictability of investment the budget is designed to provide and undercutting not only the principle of budget unity, but also Parliament’s role as a legislator and budgetary and discharge authority and in holding the executive to account;

    M. whereas the Union is founded on the values of respect for human dignity, freedom, democracy, equality, the rule of law and respect for human rights, including the rights of persons belonging to minorities; whereas breaches of those values undermine the cohesion of the Union, erode the rights of Union citizens and weaken mutual trust among Member States;

    1. Insists that, in a fast changing world where people rightly expect more from the Union and its budget and where the Union is confronted with a growing number of crises, the next MFF must be endowed with increased resources compared to the 2021-2027 period, moving away from the historically restrictive, self-imposed level of 1 % of GNI;

    2. Underscores that the next MFF must focus on financing European public goods with discernible added value compared to national spending; highlights the need for enhanced synergies and better coordination between Union and national spending; emphasises that spending will have to address major challenges, such as the return of large-scale warfare in the Union’s immediate neighbourhood, a highly challenging economic and social backdrop, a competitiveness gap and the worsening climate and biodiversity crisis;

    3. Considers that the ‘one national plan per Member State’ approach as envisaged by the Commission, with the Recovery and Resilience Facility model as a blueprint, cannot be the basis for shared management spending post-2027; underlines that the design of shared management spending under the next MFF must fully safeguard Parliament’s roles as legislator and budgetary and discharge authority and be designed and implemented through close collaboration with regional and local authorities and all relevant stakeholders;

    4. Calls for the next MFF to continue support for economic, social and territorial cohesion in order to help bind the Union together, deepen the single market, promote convergence and reduce inequality, poverty and social exclusion;

    5. Considers that the idea of an umbrella Competitiveness Fund merging existing programmes as envisaged by the Commission is not fit for purpose; stresses that the fund should instead be a new instrument taking advantage of a toolbox of funding based on lessons learned from InvestEU and the Innovation Fund and complementing existing, highly successful programmes;

    6. Stresses that, in particular in the light of the US’s retreat from its role as a global guarantor of peace and security, there is a clear need to progress towards a genuine Defence Union, with the next MFF supporting a comprehensive security approach through an increase in investment; stresses that defence spending cannot come at the expense of nor lead to a reduction in long-term investment in the economic, social and territorial cohesion of the Union;

    7. Calls for genuine simplification for final beneficiaries by avoiding programmes with overlapping objectives, diverging eligibility criteria and different rules governing horizontal provisions; underlines that simplification cannot mean more leeway for the Commission without the necessary checks and balances and must therefore be achieved with full respect for the institutional balance provided for in the Treaties;

    8. Insists on enhanced in-built crisis response capacity in the next MFF and sufficient margins under each heading; stresses that, alongside predictability for investment, spending programmes should retain a substantial in-built flexibility reserve, with allocation to specific policy objectives to be decided by the budgetary authority; underlines that flexibility for humanitarian aid should be ring-fenced; considers that the post-2027 MFF should include two special instruments – one dedicated to ensuring solidarity in the event of natural disasters and one for general-purpose crisis response;

    9. Underlines that compliance with Union values and fundamental rights is an essential pre-requisite to access EU funds; insists that the Union budget be protected against misuse, fraud and breaches of the principle of the rule of law and calls for a stronger link between the rule of law and the Union budget post-2027;

    10. Underlines that the repayment of NGEU borrowing must not endanger the financing of EU policies and priorities; stresses, therefore, that all costs related to borrowing backed by the Union budget or the budgetary headroom be treated distinctly from appropriations for EU programmes within the future MFF architecture;

    11. Calls on the Council to adopt new own resources as a matter of urgency in order to enable sustainable repayment of NGEU borrowing; stresses that new genuine own resources, beyond the IIA, are essential for the Union’s higher spending needs; considers that all instruments and tools should be explored in order to provide the Union with the necessary resources, and considers, in this respect, that joint borrowing presents a viable option to ensure that the Union has sufficient resources to respond to acute Union-wide crises, such as the ongoing crisis in the area of security and defence;

    12. Stands ready to work constructively with the Council and Commission to deliver a long-term budget that addresses the Union’s needs; highlights that the post-2027 MFF is being constructed in a far from ‘business as usual’ context and takes seriously its institutional role as enshrined in the Treaties; insists that it will only approve a long-term budget that is fit for purpose for the Union in a changing world and calls for swift adoption of the MFF to enable timely implementation of spending programmes from 1 January 2028;

    A long-term budget with a renewed spending focus

    13. Considers that, in view of the structural challenges facing the Union, the post-2027 MFF should adjust its spending focus to ensure that the Union can meet its strategic policy aims as detailed below;

     

    Competitiveness, strategic autonomy, social, economic and territorial cohesion and resilience

    14. Is convinced that boosting competitiveness, decarbonising the economy and enhancing the Union’s innovation capacity are central priorities for the post-2027 MFF and are vital to ensure long-term, sustainable and inclusive growth and a thriving, more resilient economy and society;

    15. Considers that the Union must develop a competitiveness framework in line with its own values and political aims and that competitiveness must foster not only economic growth, but also social, economic and territorial cohesion and environmental sustainability as underlined in both the Draghi and Letta reports;

    16. Underlines that, as spelt out in the Letta and Draghi reports, the European economy and social model are under intense strain, with the productivity, competitiveness and skills gap having knock-on effects on the quality of jobs and on living standards for Europeans already grappling with high housing, energy and food prices; is concerned that a lack of job opportunities and high costs of living increase the risk of a brain drain away from Europe;

    17. Points out that Draghi puts the annual investment gap with respect to innovation and infrastructure at EUR 750-800 billion per year between 2025 and 2030; underlines that the Union budget must play a vital role but it cannot cover that shortfall alone, and that the bulk of the effort will have to come from the private sector – points to the need to exploit synergies between public and private investment, in particular by simplifying and harmonising the EU investment architecture;

    18. Stresses that the Union budget must be carefully coordinated with national spending, so as to ensure complementarity, and must be designed such that it can de-risk, mobilise and leverage private investment effectively, enabling start-ups and SMEs to access funds more readily; calls, therefore, for programmes such as InvestEU, which ensures additionality and follows a market-based, demand-driven approach, to be significantly reinforced in the next MFF; considers that financial instruments and budgetary guarantees are an effective use of resources to achieve critical Union policy goals and calls for them to be further simplified;

    19. Insists that more must be done to maximise the potential of the role of the European Investment Bank (EIB) Group – together with other international and national financial institutions – in lending and de-risking in strategic policy areas, such as climate and, latterly, security and defence projects; calls for an increased risk appetite and ambition from the EIB Group to crowd in investment, based on a strong capital position, and for a reinforced investment partnership to ensure that every euro spent at Union level is used in the most effective manner;

    20. Emphasises that funding for research and innovation, including support for basic research, should be significantly increased, should be focused on the Union’s strategic priorities, should continue to be determined by the principle of excellence and should remain merit-based; considers that there should be sufficient resources across the MFF and at national level to fund all high-quality projects throughout the innovation cycle and to achieve the 3 % GDP target for research and development spending by 2030;

    21. Stresses that the next MFF, building on the current Connecting Europe Facility, should include much greater, directly managed funding for energy, transport and digital infrastructure, with priority given to cross-border connections and national links with European added value; considers that such infrastructure is an absolute precondition for a successful deepening of the single market and for increasing the Union’s resilience in a changing geopolitical order;

    22. Points out that a secure and robust space sector is critical for the Union’s autonomy and sovereignty and therefore needs sustained investment;

    23. Underlines that a more competitive, productive and socially inclusive economy helps to generate high-quality, well-paid jobs, thus enhancing people’s standard of living; emphasises that, through programmes such as the European Social Fund+ and Erasmus+, the Union budget can play an important role in supporting education and training systems, enhancing social inclusion, boosting workforce adaptability through reskilling and upskilling, and thus preparing people for employment in a modern economy;

    24. Insists that the Union budget should continue to support important economic and job-creating sectors where the Union is already a world leader, such as tourism and the cultural and creative sectors; underscores the need for dedicated funding for tourism, including to implement the EU Strategy for Sustainable Tourism, in the Union budget post-2027; points to the importance of Creative Europe in contributing to Europe’s diversity and competitiveness and in supporting vibrant societies;

    25. Stresses that, in order to compete with other major global players, the European economy must also become more competitive and resilient on the supply side by investing more in the Union’s open strategic autonomy through enhanced industrial policy and a focus on strategic sectors, resource-efficiency and critical technologies to reduce dependence on third countries;

    26. Considers that, in light of the above, the idea of an umbrella Competitiveness Fund merging existing programmes as envisaged by the Commission is not fit for purpose; stresses that the fund should instead be a new instrument taking advantage of a toolbox of funding based on lessons learned from InvestEU and the Innovation Fund; recalls that, under Article 182 TFEU, the Union is required to adopt a framework programme for research;

    27. Notes that, in the Commission communication on the competitiveness compass, the Commission argues that a new competitiveness coordination tool should be established in order to better align industrial and research policies and investment between EU and national level; notes that the proposed new tool is envisaged as part of a ‘new, lean steering mechanism’ designed ‘to reinforce the link between overall policy coordination and the EU budget’; insists that Parliament must play a full decision-making role in both mechanisms;

    28. Emphasises that food security is a vital component of strategic autonomy and that the next MFF must continue to support the competitiveness and resilience of the Union’s farming and fisheries sectors, including small-scale and young farmers and fishers, and help the sectors to better protect the climate and biodiversity, as well as the seas and oceans; highlights that a modern and simplified common agricultural policy is crucial for increasing productivity through technical progress, ensuring a fair standard of living for farmers, guaranteeing food security and the production of safe, high-quality and affordable food for Europeans, fostering generational renewal and ensuring the viability of rural areas;

    29. Points out that the farming sector is particularly vulnerable to inflationary shocks which affect farmers’ purchasing power; calls for adequate and predictable funding for the common agricultural policy in the next MFF;

    30. Recalls that social, economic and territorial cohesion is a cornerstone of European integration and is vital in binding the Union together and deepening the single market; reaffirms, in that respect, the importance of the convergence process; underlines that a modernised cohesion policy must follow a decentralised, place-based, multilevel governance approach and be built around the shared management and partnership principle, fully involving local and regional authorities and relevant stakeholders, ensuring that resources are directed where they are most needed to reduce regional disparities;

    31. Stresses that cohesion policy funding must tackle the key challenges the Union faces, such as demographic change and depopulation, and target the regions and people most in need; calls, furthermore, for enhanced access to EU funding for cities, regions and urban authorities;

    32. Recalls the importance of the social dimension of the European Union and of promoting the implementation of the European Pillar of Social Rights, its Action Plan and headline targets; emphasises that the Union budget should, therefore, play a pivotal role in reducing inequality, poverty and social exclusion, including by supporting children, families and vulnerable groups; recalls that around 20 million children in the Union are at risk of poverty and social exclusion; stresses that addressing child poverty across the Union requires appropriately funded, comprehensive and integrated measures, together with the efficient implementation of the European Child Guarantee at national level; emphasises that Parliament has consistently requested a dedicated budget within the ESF+ to support the Child Guarantee as a central pillar of the EU anti-poverty strategy;

    33. Highlights, in this regard, the EU-wide housing crisis affecting millions of families and young people; stresses the need for enhanced support for housing through the Union budget, in particular via cohesion policy, and through other funding sources, such as the EIB Group and national promotional banks; acknowledges that, while Union financing cannot solve the housing crisis alone, it can play a crucial role in financing urgent measures and complementing broader Union and national efforts to improve housing affordability and enhance energy efficiency of the housing stock;

    34. Points out that Russia’s war of aggression against Ukraine has had substantial economic and social consequences, in particular in Member States bordering Russia and Belarus; insists that the next MFF provide support to these regions;

    The green and digital transitions

    35. Highlights that the green and digital transitions are inextricably linked to competitiveness, the modernisation of the economy and the resilience of society and act as catalysts for a future-oriented and resource-efficient economy; insists therefore, that the post-2027 MFF must continue to support and to further accelerate the twin transitions;

    36. Recalls that the Union budget is an essential contributor to achieving climate neutrality by 2050, including through support for the 2030 and 2040 targets; underlines that the transition will require a decarbonisation of the economy, in particular through the deployment of clean technologies, improved energy and transport infrastructure and more energy-efficient housing; notes that the Commission estimates additional investment needs to achieve climate neutrality by 2050 at 1.5 % of GDP per year compared to the decade 2011-2020 and that, while the Union budget alone cannot cover the gap, it must remain a vital contributor; calls, therefore, for increased directly managed support for environment and biodiversity protection and climate action building on the current LIFE programme;

    37. Underlines that industry will be central in the transition to net zero and the establishment of the Energy Union, and that support will be needed in helping some industrial sectors and their workers to adapt; stresses the importance of a just transition that must leave no one behind, requiring, inter alia, investment in regions that are heavily fossil-fuel dependent and increased support for vulnerable households, in particular through the Just Transition Mechanism and the Social Climate Fund;

    38. Points to the profound technological shift under way, with technologies such as artificial intelligence and quantum both creating opportunities, in terms of the Union’s economic potential and global leadership and improvements to citizens’ lives, and posing reliability, ethical and sovereignty challenges; stresses that the next MFF must support research into, and the development and safe application of digital technologies and help people to hone the knowledge and skills they need to work with and use them;

    Security, defence and preparedness

    39. Recalls that peace and security are the foundation for the Union’s prosperity, social model and competitiveness, and a vital pillar of the Union’s geopolitical standing; stresses that the next MFF must support a comprehensive security approach by investing significantly more in safeguarding the Union against the myriad threats it faces;

    40. Underlines that, as the Niinistö report makes clear, multiple threats are combining to heighten instability and increase the Union’s vulnerability, chief among them the fragmenting global order, the security threat posed by Russia and Belarus, growing tensions globally, hostile international actors, the globalisation of criminal networks, hybrid campaigns – which include cyberattacks, foreign information manipulation, disinformation and interference and the instrumentalisation of migration – increasingly frequent and intense extreme weather events as a result of climate change, and health threats;

    41. Points out that the Union has played a vital role in achieving lasting peace on its territory and must continue to do so by adjusting to the reality of war on its doorstep and the need to vastly boost defence infrastructure, capabilities and readiness, including through the Union budget, going far beyond the current allocation of less than 2 % of the MFF;

    42. Notes that European defence capabilities suffer from decades of under-investment and that, according to the Commission, the defence spending gap currently stands at EUR 500 billion for the next decade; underlines that the Union budget alone cannot fill the gap, but has an important role to play, in conjunction with national budgets and with a focus on clear EU added value; considers that the Union budget and lending through the EIB Group can help incentivise investment in defence; stresses that defence spending must not come at the expense of social and environmental spending, nor must it lead to a reduction in funding for long-standing Union policies that have proved their worth over time;

    43. Underlines the merits of the defence programmes and instruments put in place during the current MFF, which have enhanced joint research, production and procurement in the field of defence, providing a valuable foundation on which to build further Union policy and investment;

    44. Emphasises that, given the geopolitical situation, there is a clear need to act and to progress towards a genuine Defence Union, in coordination with NATO and in full alignment with the neutrality commitments of individual Member States; concurs, in that regard, with the Commission’s analysis that the next MFF must provide a comprehensive and robust framework in support of EU defence;

    45. Underscores the importance of a competitive and resilient European defence technological and industrial base; considers that enhanced joint EU-level investment in defence in the next MFF backed up by a clear and transparent governance structure can help to avoid duplication, generate economies of scale, and thus significant savings for Member States, reduce fragmentation and ensure the interoperability of equipment and systems; underscores the importance of technology in modern defence systems and therefore of investing in research, cyber-defence and cybersecurity and in dual-use products; points to the need to direct support towards the defence industry within the Union, thus strengthening strategic autonomy, creating quality high-skilled jobs, driving innovation and creating cross-border opportunities for EU businesses, including SMEs;

    46. Points to the importance of increasing support in the budget for military mobility, which upgrades infrastructure for dual-use military and civilian purposes, enabling the large-scale movement of military equipment and personnel at short notice and thus contributing to the Union’s defence capabilities and collective security; highlights, in that regard, the importance of financing for the trans-European transport networks to enable their adaptation for dual-use purposes;

    47. Emphasises that the Union needs to ramp up funding for preparedness across the board; is alarmed by the growing impact of natural disasters, which are often the result of climate change and are therefore likely to occur with greater frequency and intensity in the future; points out that, according to the 2024 European Climate Risk Assessment Report, cumulated economic losses from natural disasters could reach about 1.4 % of Union GDP;

    48. Underlines, therefore, that, in addition to efforts to mitigate climate change through the green transition, significant investment is required to adapt to climate change, in particular to prevent and reduce the impact of natural disasters and severe weather events; considers that support for this purpose, such as through the current Union Civil Protection Mechanism, must be significantly increased in the next MFF and made available quickly to local and regional authorities, which are often on the frontline;

    49. Emphasises that reconstruction and recovery measures after natural disasters must be based on the ‘build back better’ approach and prioritise nature-based solutions; stresses the importance of sustainable water management and security and hydric resilience as part of the Union’s overall preparedness strategy;

    50. Recalls that the COVID-19 pandemic wreaked economic and social havoc globally and that a key lesson from the experience is that there is a need to prioritise investment in prevention of, preparedness for and response to health threats, in medical research and disease prevention, in access to critical medicines, in healthcare infrastructure, in physical and mental health and in the resilience and accessibility of public health systems in the Union; recalls that strategic autonomy in health is key to ensuring the Union’s preparedness in this area;

    51. Considers that the next MFF must build on the work done in the current programming period by ensuring that the necessary investment is in place to build a genuine European Health Union that delivers for all citizens;

    52. Underlines that, with technological developments, it has become easier for malicious and opportunistic foreign actors to spread disinformation, encourage online hate speech, interfere in elections and mount cyberattacks against the Union’s interests; insists that the next MFF must invest in enhanced cybersecurity capabilities and equip the Union to counter hybrid warfare in its various guises;

    53. Stresses that a free, independent and pluralistic media is a fundamental component of Europe’s resilience, safeguarding not only the free flow of information but also a democratic mindset, critical thinking and informed decision-making; points to the importance of investment in independent and investigative journalism, fact-checking initiatives, digital and media literacy and critical thinking to safeguard against disinformation, foreign information manipulation and electoral interference as part of the European Democracy Shield initiative and therefore to guarantee democratic resilience; underscores the need for continued Union budget support for initiatives in these areas;

    54. Underscores the importance of continued funding, in the next MFF, for effective protection of the EU’s external borders; underlines the need to counter transnational criminal networks and better protect victims of trafficking networks, and to strengthen resilience and response capabilities to address hybrid attacks and the instrumentalisation of migration, by third countries or hostile non-state actors; highlights, in particular, the need for support to frontline Member States for the purposes of securing the external borders of the EU;

    55. Underlines that the EU’s resilience and preparedness are inextricably linked to those of its regional and global partners; emphasises that strengthening partners’ capacity to prevent, withstand and effectively respond to extreme weather events, health crises, hybrid campaigns, cyberattacks or armed conflict also lowers the risk of spill-over effects for Europe;

    External action and enlargement

    56. Insists that, in a context of heightened global instability, the Union must continue to engage constructively with third countries and support peace, and conflict prevention, stability, prosperity, security, human rights, the rule of law, equality, democracy and sustainable development globally, in line with its global responsibility values and international commitments;

    57. Regrets the fact that external action in the current MFF has been underfunded, leading to significant recourse to special instruments and substantial reinforcements in the mid-term revision; notes, in particular, that humanitarian aid funding has been woefully inadequate, prompting routine use of the Emergency Aid Reserve;

    58. Underlines that the US’s retreat from its post-war global role in guaranteeing peace, security and democracy, in leading on global governance in the rules-based, multilateral international order and in providing essential development and humanitarian aid to those most in need around the world will leave an enormous gap and that the Union has a responsibility and overwhelming strategic interest in helping to fill that gap; calls on the Commission to address the consequences of the US’s retreat at the latest in its proposal for the post-2027 MFF;

    59. Stresses that the next MFF must continue to tackle the most pressing global challenges, from fighting climate change, to providing relief in the event of natural disasters, preventing and addressing violent conflict and guaranteeing global security, ensuring global food security, improving healthcare and education systems, reducing poverty and inequality, promoting democracy, human rights, the rule of law and social justice and boosting competitiveness and the security of global supply chains, in full compliance with the principle of policy coherence for development; emphasises, in particular, the need for support for the Union’s Southern and Eastern Neighbourhoods;

    60. Underlines that, in particular in light of the drastic cuts to the USAID budget, the budget must uphold the Union’s role as the world’s leading provider of development aid and climate finance in line with the Union’s global obligations and commitments; recalls, in that regard, that the Union and its Member States have collectively committed to allocating 0.7 % of their GNI to official development assistance and that poverty alleviation must remain its primary objective; insists that the budget must continue to support the Union in its efforts to defend the rules-based international order, democracy, multilateralism, human rights and fundamental values;

    61. Insists that, given the unprecedented scale of humanitarian crises, mounting global challenges and uncertainty of US assistance under the current administration, humanitarian aid funding must be significantly enhanced and that its use must remain solely needs-based and respect the principles of neutrality, independence and impartiality; emphasises that the needs-based nature of humanitarian aid requires ring-fenced funding delivered through a stand-alone spending programme, distinct from other external action financing; underscores, furthermore, that effective humanitarian aid provision is contingent on predictability through a sufficient annual baseline allocation;

    62. Emphasises that humanitarian aid, by its very nature, requires substantial flexibility and response capacity; considers, therefore, that, in addition to an adequate baseline figure, humanitarian aid will require significant ring-fenced flexibility in its design to enable an effective response to the growing crises;

    63. Emphasises that, in a context in which global actors are increasingly using trade interdependence as a means of economic coercion, the Union must bolster its capacity to protect and advance its own strategic interests, develop more robust tools to counter coercion and ensure genuine reciprocity in its partnerships; stresses that such an approach requires the strategic allocation of external financing so as to support, for example, economic, security and energy partnerships that align with the Union’s values and strategic interests;

    64. Considers that enlargement represents an opportunity to strengthen the Union as a geopolitical power and that the next MFF is pivotal for preparing the Union for enlargement and the candidate countries for accession; recalls that the stability, security and democratic resilience of the candidate countries are inextricably connected to those of the EU and require sustained strategic investment, linked to reforms, to support their convergence with Union standards; underlines the important role that citizens and civil society organisations play in the process of enlargement;

    65. Points to the need for strategically targeted support for pre-accession and for growth and investment; is of the view that post-2027 pre-accession assistance should be provided in the form of both grants and loans; believes, in that context, that the future framework should allow for innovative financing mechanisms, as well as lending to candidate countries backed by the budgetary headroom (the difference between the own resources and the MFF ceilings);

    66. Stresses that financial support must be conditional on the implementation of reforms aligned with the Union acquis and policies and adherence to Union values; emphasises, in this regard, the need for a strong governance model that ensures parliamentary accountability, oversight and control and a strong, effective anti-fraud architecture;

    67. Reiterates its full support for Ukrainians in their fight for freedom and democracy and deplores the terrible suffering and impact resulting from Russia’s unprovoked and unjustifiable war of aggression; welcomes the decision to grant Ukraine and the neighbouring Republic of Moldova candidate country status and insists on the need to deploy the necessary funds to support their accession processes;

    68. Underlines that pre-accession support to Ukraine has to be distinct from and additional to financial assistance for macroeconomic stability, reconstruction and post-war recovery, where needs are far more substantial and require a concerted international effort, of which support through the Union budget should be an important part;

    69. Is convinced that the existing mandatory revision clause in the event of enlargement should be maintained in the next framework and that national envelopes should not be affected; underlines that the next MFF will also have to put in place appropriate transitional and phasing-in measures for key spending areas, such as cohesion and agriculture, based on a careful assessment of the impacts on different sectors;

    Fundamental rights, Union values and the rule of law

    70. Emphasises the importance of the Union budget and programmes like Erasmus+ and Citizens, Equality, Rights and Values in promoting and protecting democracy and the Union’s values, fostering the Union’s common cultural heritage and European integration, enhancing citizen engagement, civic education and youth participation, safeguarding and promoting fundamental rights enshrined in the Charter of Fundamental Rights and the rule of law; calls, in this regard, for increased funding for Erasmus+ in the next MFF; points to the importance of the independence of the justice system, the sound functioning of national institutions, de-oligarchisation, robust support for and, in line with article 11(2) TEU, an active dialogue with civil society, which is vital for fostering an active civic space, ensuring accountability and transparency and informing policymakers about best practices from the ground;

    71. Highlights, in that connection, that the recast of the Financial Regulation requires the Commission and the Member States, in the implementation of the budget, to ensure compliance with the Charter of Fundamental Rights and to respect the values on which the Union is founded, which are enshrined in Article 2 TEU; expects the Commission to ensure that the proposals for the next MFF, including for the spending programmes, are aligned with the Financial Regulation recast;

    72. Stresses that instability in neighbouring regions and beyond, poverty, underlying trends in economic development, demographic changes and climate change, continue to generate migration flows towards the Union, placing significant pressure on asylum and migration systems; underlines that the post-2027 MFF must support the full and swift implementation of the Union’s Asylum and Migration Pact and effective return and readmission policies, in line with fundamental rights and EU values, including the principle of solidarity and fair sharing of responsibility; underlines, moreover, that, in line with the Pact, the EU must pursue enhanced cooperation and mutually beneficial partnerships with third countries on migration, with adequate parliamentary scrutiny, and that such cooperation must abide by EU and international law;

    73. Underlines that compliance with Union values and fundamental rights is an essential pre-requisite to access EU funds; highlights the importance of strong links between respect for the rule of law and access to EU funds under the current MFF; believes that the protection of the Union’s financial interests depends on respect for the rule of law at national level; welcomes, in particular, the positive impact of the Rule of Law Conditionality Regulation in protecting the Union’s financial interests in cases of systemic and persistent breaches of the rule of law; calls on the Commission and the Council to apply the regulation strictly, consistently and without undue delay wherever necessary; emphasises that decisions to suspend or reduce Union funding over breaches of the rule of law must be based on objective criteria and not be guided by other considerations, nor be the outcome of negotiations;

    74. Points to the need for a stronger link between the rule of law and the Union budget post-2027 and welcomes the Commission’s commitment to bolster links between the recommendations in the annual rule of law report and access to funds through the budget; calls on the Commission to outline, in the annual rule of law report from 2025 onwards, the extent to which identified weaknesses in rule of law regimes potentially pose a risk to the Union budget; welcomes, furthermore, the link between respect for Union values and the implementation of the budget and calls on the Commission to actively monitor Member States’ compliance with this principle in a unified manner and to take swift action in the event of non-compliance;

    75. Calls for the consolidation of a robust rule of law toolbox, building on the current conditionality provisions under the Recovery and Resilience Facility (RRF), the horizontal enabling conditions in the Common Provisions Regulation and the relevant provisions of the Financial Regulation and insists that the toolbox should cover the entire Union budget; underlines the need for far greater transparency and consistency with regard to the application of tools to protect the rule of law and for Parliament’s role to be strengthened in the application and scrutiny of such measures; insists, furthermore, on the need for consistency across instruments when assessing breaches of the rule of law in Member States;

    76. Recalls that the Rule of Law Conditionality Regulation provides that final recipients should not be deprived of the benefits of EU funds in the event of sanctions being applied to their government; believes that, to date, this provision has not been effective and stresses the importance of applying a smart conditionality approach so that beneficiaries are not penalised because of their government’s actions; calls on the Commission, in line with its stated intention in the political guidelines, to propose specific measures to ensure that local and regional authorities, civil society and other beneficiaries can continue to benefit from Union funding in cases of breaches of the rule of law by national governments without weakening the application of the regulation and maintaining the Member State’s obligation to pay under Union law;

     A long-term budget that mainstreams the Union’s policy objectives

    77. Stresses that a long-term budget that is fully aligned with the Union’s strategic aims requires that key objectives be mainstreamed across the budget through a set of horizontal principles, building on the lessons from the current MFF and RRF;

    78. Recalls that the implementation of horizontal principles should not lead to an excessive administrative burden on beneficiaries and be in line with the principle of proportionality; calls for innovative solutions and the use of automated reporting tools, including artificial intelligence, to achieve more efficient data collection;

    79. Underlines, therefore, that the next MFF must ensure that, across the board, spending programmes pursue climate and biodiversity objectives, promote and protect rights and equal opportunities for all, including gender equality, support competitiveness and bolster the Union’s preparedness against threats;

    80. Points out that effective mainstreaming is best achieved through a toolbox of measures, primarily through policy, project and regulatory design, thorough impact assessments and solid tracking of spending and, in specific cases, spending targets based on relevant and available data; welcomes the significant improvements in performance reporting in the current MFF, which allow for much better scrutiny of the impact of EU spending and calls for this to be further developed in the next programing period;

    81. Welcomes the development of a methodology to track gender-based spending and considers that the lessons learnt, in particular as regards the collection of gender-disaggregated data, the monitoring of implementation and impact and administrative burden, should be applied in the next MFF in order to improve the methodology; calls on the Commission to explore the feasibility of gender budgeting in the next MFF; stresses, in the same vein, the need for a significant improvement in climate and biodiversity mainstreaming methodologies to move towards the measurement of impact;

    82. Regrets that the Commission has not systematically conducted thorough impact assessments, including gender impact assessments, for all legislation involving spending through the budget and insists that this change;

    83. Is pleased that the climate mainstreaming target of 30 % is projected to be exceeded in the current MFF; regrets, however, that the Union is not on track to meet the 10 % target for 2026 for biodiversity-related expenditure; insists that the targets in the IIA have nevertheless been a major factor in driving climate and biodiversity spending; calls on the Commission to adapt the spending targets contributing positively to climate and biodiversity in line with the Union policy ambitions in this regard, taking into account the investment needs for these policy ambitions;

    84. Stresses, furthermore, that the Union budget should be implemented in line with Article 33(2) of the Financial Regulation, therefore without doing significant harm[12] to the specified objectives, respecting applicable working and employment conditions and taking into account the principle of gender equality;

    85. Welcomes the Commission’s commitment to phase out all fossil fuel subsidies and environmentally harmful subsidies in the next MFF; expects the Commission to come forward with its planned roadmap in this regard as part of its proposal for the next MFF;

    A long-term budget with an effective administration at the service of Europeans

    86. Underlines the need for Union policies to be underpinned by a well-functioning administration; insists that, post-2027, sufficient financial and staff resources be allocated from the outset so that Union institutions, bodies, decentralised agencies and the European Public Prosecutor’s Office can ensure effective and efficient policy design, high-quality delivery and enforcement, provide technical assistance, continue to attract the best people from all Member States, thus ensuring geographical balance, and have leeway to adjust to changing circumstances;

    87. Regrets that the Union’s ability to implement policy effectively and protect its financial interests within the current MFF has been undermined by stretched administrative resources and a dogmatic application of a policy of stable staffing, despite increasing demands and responsibilities; points, for example, to the failure to provide sufficient staff to properly implement and enforce the Digital Services[13] and Digital Markets Acts[14], thus undercutting the legislation’s effectiveness and to the repeated redeployments from programmes to decentralised agencies to cover staffing needs; insists that staffing levels be determined by an objective needs assessment when legislation is proposed and definitively adopted, and factored into planning for administrative expenditure from the outset;

    88. Emphasises that the Commission has sought, to some degree, to circumvent its own stable staffing policy by increasing staff attached to programmes and facilities and thus not covered by the administrative spending ceiling; underscores, however, that such an approach merely masks the problem and may ultimately undermine the operational capacity of programmes; insists, therefore, that additional responsibilities require administrative expenditure and must not erode programme envelopes;

    89. Stresses that up-front investment in secure and interoperable IT infrastructure and data mining capabilities can also generate longer-term cost savings and hugely enhance policy delivery and tracking of spending;

    90. Acknowledges that, in the absence of any correction mechanism in the current MFF, high inflation has significantly driven up statutory costs, requiring extensive use of special instruments to cover the shortfall; regrets that the Council elected not to take up the Commission’s proposal to raise the ceiling for administrative expenditure in the MFF revision, thus further eroding special instruments;

    A long-term budget that is simpler and more transparent

    91. Stresses that the next MFF must be designed so as to simplify the lives of all beneficiaries by cutting unnecessary red tape; underlines that simplification will require harmonising rules and reporting requirements wherever possible, including, as relevant, ensuring consistency between the applicable rules at European, national and regional levels; underlines, in that respect, the need for a genuine, user-friendly single entry point for EU funding and a simplified application procedure designed in consultation with relevant stakeholders; points out, furthermore, that the next MFF must be implemented as close to people as possible;

    92. Calls for genuine simplification where there are overlapping objectives, diverging eligibility criteria and different rules governing horizontal provisions that should be uniform across programmes; considers that an assessment of which spending programmes should be included in the next MFF must be based on the above aspects, on the need to focus spending on clearly identified policy objectives with clear European added value and on the policy intervention logic of each programme; stresses that reducing the number of programmes is not an end in itself;

    93. Underlines that simplification cannot mean more leeway for the Commission without the necessary checks and balances and must therefore be achieved with full respect for the institutional balance provided for in the Treaties;

    94. Insists that simplification cannot come at the expense of the quality of programme design and implementation and that, therefore, a simpler budget must also be a more transparent budget, enabling better accountability, scrutiny, control of spending and reducing the risks of double funding, misuse and fraud; underlines that any reduction in programmes must be offset by a far more detailed breakdown of the budget by budget line, in contrast to some programme mergers in the current MFF, such as the Neighbourhood, Development and International Cooperation Instrument – Global Europe (NDICI – Global Europe), which is an example not to follow; calls, therefore, for a sufficiently detailed breakdown by budget line to enable the budgetary authority to exercise proper accountability and ensure that decision-making in the annual budgetary procedure and in the course of budget implementation is meaningful;

    95. Recalls that transparency is essential to retain citizens’ trust, and that fraud and misuse of funds are extremely detrimental to that trust; underlines, therefore, the need for Parliament to be able to control spending and assess whether discharge can be granted; insists that proper accountability requires robust auditing for all budgetary expenditure based on the application of a single audit trail; calls on the Commission to put in place harmonised and effective anti-fraud mechanisms across funding instruments for the post-2027 MFF that ensure the protection of the Union’s budget;

    96. Reiterates its long-standing position that all EU-level spending should be brought within the purview of the budgetary authority, thereby ensuring transparency, democratic control and protection of the Union’s financial interests; calls, therefore, for the full budgetisation of (partially) off-budget instruments such as the Social Climate Fund, the Innovation Fund and the Modernisation Fund, or their successors;

    A long-term budget that is more flexible and more responsive to crises and shocks

    97. Points out that, traditionally, the MFF has not been conceived with a crisis response or flexibility logic, but rather has been designed primarily to ensure medium-term investment predictability; underlines that, in a rapidly changing political, security, economic and social context, such an approach is no longer tenable; insists on sufficient in-built crisis response capacity in the next MFF;

    98. Underscores that the current MFF has been beset by a lack of flexibility and an inability to adjust to evolving spending priorities; considers that the next MFF needs to strike a better balance between investment predictability and flexibility to adjust spending focus; highlights that spending in certain areas requires greater stability than in others where flexibility is more valuable; stresses that recurrent redeployments are not a viable way to finance the Union’s priorities as they damage investments and jeopardise the delivery of agreed policy objectives;

    99. Believes that, while allocating a significant portion of funding to objectives up-front, spending programmes should retain a substantial in-built flexibility reserve, with allocation to specific policy objectives to be decided by the budgetary authority; notes that the NDICI – Global Europe’s emerging challenges and priorities cushion provides a model for such a flexibility reserve, but that the decision-making process for its mobilisation must not be replicated in the future MFF; points to the need for stronger, more effective scrutiny powers of the co-legislators over the setting of policy priorities and objectives and a detailed budgetary breakdown to ensure that the budgetary authority is equipped to make meaningful and informed decisions;

    100. Underlines that the MFF must have sufficient margins under each heading to ensure that new instruments or spending objectives agreed over the programming period can be accommodated without eroding funding for other policy and long-term strategic objectives or eating into crisis response capacity;

    101. Underlines that the possibility for budgetary transfers under the Financial Regulation already provides for flexibility to adjust to evolving spending needs in the course of budget implementation; stresses that, under the current rules, the Commission has significant freedom to transfer considerable amounts between policy areas without budgetary authority approval, which limits scrutiny and control; calls, therefore, for the rules to be changed so as to introduce a maximum amount, in addition to a maximum percentage per budget line, for transfers without approval; considers that for transfers from Union institutions other than the Commission that are subject to a possible duly justified objection by Parliament or the Council, a threshold below which they would be exempt from that procedure could be a useful measure of simplification;

    102. Recalls that the current MFF has been placed under further strain due to high levels of inflation in a context where an annual 2 % deflator is applied to 2018 prices, reducing the budget’s real-terms value and squeezing its operational and administrative capacity; considers, therefore, that the future budget should be endowed with sufficient response capacity to enable the budget to adapt to inflationary shocks;

    103. Calls for a root-and-branch reform of the existing special instruments to bolster crisis response capacity and ensure an effective and swift reaction through more rapid mobilisation; underlines that the current instruments are both inadequate in size and constrained by excessive rigidity, with several effectively ring-fenced according to crisis type; points out that enhanced crisis response capacity will ensure that cohesion policy funds are not called upon for that purpose and can therefore be used for their intended investment objectives;

    104. Considers that the post-2027 MFF should include only two special instruments – one dedicated to ensuring solidarity in the event of natural disasters (the successor to the existing European Solidarity Reserve) and one for general-purpose crisis response and for responding to any unforeseen needs and emerging priorities, including where amounts in the special instrument for natural disasters are insufficient (the successor to the Flexibility Instrument); insists that both special instruments should be adequately funded from the outset and able to carry over unspent amounts indefinitely over the MFF period; believes that all other special instruments can either be wound up or subsumed into the two special instruments or into existing programmes;

    105. Calls for the future Flexibility Instrument to be heavily front-loaded and subsequently to be fed through a number of additional sources of financing: unspent margins from previous years (as with the current Single Margin Instrument), the annual surplus from the previous year, a fines-based mechanism modelled on the existing Article 5 of the MFF Regulation, reflows from financial instruments and decommitted appropriations; underlines that the next MFF should be designed such that the future special instruments are not required to cover debt repayment;

    106. Underlines that re-use of the surplus, of reflows from financial instruments and surplus provisioning and of decommitments would require amendments to the Financial Regulation;

    107. Points out that, with sufficient up-front resources and such arrangements for re-using unused funds, the budget would have far greater response capacity without impinging on the predictability of national GNI-based contributions; insists that an MFF endowed with greater flexibility and response capacity is less likely to require a substantial mid-term revision;

    A long-term budget that is more results-focused

    108. Emphasises that, in order to maximise impact, it is imperative that spending under the next MFF be much more rigorously aligned with the Union’s strategic policy aims and better coordinated with spending at national level; underlines that, in turn, consultation with regional and local authorities is vital to facilitate access to funding and ensure that Union support meets the real needs of final recipients and delivers tangible benefits for people; underscores the importance of technical assistance to implementing authorities to help ensure timely implementation, additionality of investments and therefore maximum impact;

    109. Underlines that, in order to support effective coordination between Union and national spending, the Commission envisages a ‘new, lean steering mechanism’ designed ‘to reinforce the link between overall policy coordination and the EU budget’; insists that Parliament play a full decision-making role in any coordination or steering mechanism;

    110. Considers that the RRF, with its focus on performance and links between reforms and investments and budgetary support, has helped to drive national investments and reforms that would not otherwise have taken place;

    111. Underlines that the RRF can help to inform the delivery of Union spending under shared management; recalls, however, that the RRF was agreed in the very specific context of the COVID-19 pandemic and cannot, therefore, be replicated wholesale for future investment programmes;

    112. Points out that spending under shared management in the next MFF must involve regional and local authorities and all relevant stakeholders from design to delivery through a place-based and multilevel governance approach and in line with an improved partnership principle, ensure the cross-border European dimension of investment projects, and focus on results and impact rather than outputs by setting measurable performance indicators, ensuring availability of relevant data and feeding into programme design and adjustment;

    113. Underlines that the design of shared management spending under the next MFF must safeguard Parliament’s role as legislator, budgetary and discharge authority and in holding the executive to account, putting in place strict accountability mechanisms and guaranteeing full transparency in relation to final recipients or groups of recipients of Union spending funds through an interoperable system enabling effective tracking of cash flows and project progress;

    114. Considers that the ‘one national plan per Member State’ approach envisaged by the Commission is not in line with the principles set out above and cannot be the basis for shared management spending post-2027; recalls that, in this regard, the Union is required, under Article 175 TFEU, to provide support through instruments for agricultural, regional and social spending;

    A long-term budget that manages liabilities sustainably

    115. Recalls Parliament’s very firm opposition to subjecting the repayment of NGEU borrowing costs to a cap within an MFF heading given that these costs are subject to market conditions, influenced by external factors and thus inherently volatile, and that the repayment of borrowing costs is a non-discretionary legal obligation; stresses that introducing new own resources is also necessary to prevent future generations from bearing the burden of past debts;

    116. Deplores the fact that, under the existing architecture and despite the joint declaration by the three institutions as part of the 2020 MFF agreement whereby expenditure to cover NGEU financing costs ‘shall aim at not reducing programmes and funds’, financing for key Union programmes and resources available for special instruments, even after the MFF revision, have de facto been competing with the repayment of NGEU borrowing costs in a context of steep inflation and rising interest rates; recalls that pressure on the budget driven by NGEU borrowing costs was a key factor in cuts to flagship programmes in the MFF revision;

    117. Underlines that, to date, the Union budget has been required only to repay interest related to NGEU and that, from 2028 onwards, the budget will also have to repay the capital; underscores that, according to the Commission, the total costs for NGEU capital and interest repayments are projected to be around EUR 25-30 billion a year from 2028, equivalent to 15-20 % of payment appropriations in the 2025 budget;

    118. Acknowledges that, while NGEU borrowing costs will be more stable in the next MFF period as bonds will already have been issued, the precise repayment profile will have an impact on the level of interest and thus on the degree of volatility; insists, therefore, that all costs related to borrowing backed by the Union budget or the budgetary headroom be treated distinctly from appropriations for EU programmes within the MFF architecture;

    119. Points, in that regard, to the increasing demand for the Union budget to serve as a guarantee for the Union’s vital support through macro-financial assistance and the associated risks; underlines that, in the event of default or the withdrawal of national guarantees, the Union budget ultimately underwrites all macro-financial assistance loans and therefore bears significant and inherently unpredictable contingent liabilities, notably in relation to Ukraine;

    120. Calls, therefore, on the Commission to design a sound and durable architecture that enables sustainable management of all non-discretionary costs and liabilities, fully preserving Union programmes and the budget’s flexibility and response capacity;

    A long-term budget that is properly resourced and sustainably financed

    121. Underlines that, as described above, the budgetary needs post-2027 will be significantly higher than the amounts allocated to the 2021-2027 MFF and, in addition, will need to cover borrowing costs and debt repayment; insists, therefore, that the next MFF be endowed with significantly increased resources compared to the 2021-2027 period, moving away from the historically restrictive, self-imposed level of 1 % of GNI, which has prevented the Union from delivering on its ambitions and deprived it of the ability to respond to crises and adapt to emerging needs;

    122. Considers that all instruments and tools should be explored in order to provide the Union with those resources, in line with its priorities and identified needs; considers, in this respect, that joint borrowing through the issuance of EU bonds presents a viable option to ensure that the Union has sufficient resources to respond to acute Union-wide crises such as the ongoing crisis in the area of security and defence;

    123. Reiterates the need for sustainable and resilient revenue for the Union budget; points to the legally binding roadmap towards the introduction of new own resources in the IIA, in which Parliament, the Council and the Commission undertook to introduce sufficient new own resources to at least cover the repayment of NGEU debt; underlines that, overall, the basket of new own resources should be fair, linked to broader Union policy aims and agreed on time and with sufficient volume to meet the heightened budgetary needs;

    124. Recalls its support for the amended Commission proposal on the system of own resources; is deeply concerned by the complete absence of progress on the system of own resources in the Council; calls on the Council to adopt this proposal as a matter of urgency; and urges the Commission to spare no effort in supporting the adoption process;

    125. Calls furthermore, on the Commission to continue efforts to identify additional innovative and genuine new own resources and other revenue sources beyond those specified in the IIA; stresses that new own resources are essential not only to enable repayment of NGEU borrowing, but to ensure that the Union is equipped to cover its the higher spending needs;

    126. Calls on the Commission to design a modernised budget with a renewed spending focus, driven by the need for fairness, greater simplification, a reduced administrative burden and more transparency, including on the revenue side; underlines that existing rebates and corrections automatically expire at the end of the current MFF;

    127. Welcomes the decision, in the recast of the Financial Regulation, to treat as negative revenue any interest or other charge due to a third party relating to amounts of fines, other penalties or sanctions that are cancelled or reduced by the Court of Justice; recalls that this solution comes to an end on 31 December 2027; invites the Commission to propose a definitive solution for the next MFF that achieves the same objective of avoiding any impact on the expenditure side of the budget;

    A long-term budget grounded in close interinstitutional cooperation

    128. Underlines that Parliament intends to fully exercise its prerogatives as legislator, budgetary authority and discharge authority under the Treaties;

    129. Recalls that the requirement for close interinstitutional cooperation between the Commission, the Council and Parliament from the early design stages to the final adoption of the MFF is enshrined in the Treaties and further detailed in the IIA;

    130. Emphasises Parliament’s commitment to play its role fully throughout the process; believes that the design of the MFF should be bottom-up and based on the extensive involvement of stakeholders; underlines, furthermore, the need for a strategic dialogue among the three institutions in the run-up to the MFF proposals;

    131. Calls on the Commission to put forward practical arrangements for cooperation and genuine negotiations from the outset; points, in particular, to the importance of convening meetings of the three Presidents, as per Article 324 TFEU, wherever they can aid progress, and insists that the Commission follow up when Parliament requests such meetings; reminds the Commission of its obligation to provide information to Parliament on an equal footing with the Council as the two arms of the budgetary authority and as co-legislators on MFF-related basic acts;

    132. Recalls that the IIA specifically provides for Parliament, the Council and the Commission to ‘seek to determine specific arrangements for cooperation and dialogue’; stresses that the cooperation provisions set out in the IIA, including regular meetings between Parliament and the Council, are a bare minimum and that much more is needed to give effect to the principle in Article 312(5) TFEU of taking ‘any measure necessary to facilitate the adoption of a new MFF’; calls, therefore, on the successive Council presidencies to respect not only the letter, but also the spirit of the Treaties;

    133. Recalls that the late adoption of the MFF regulation and related legislation for the 2014-2020 and 2021-2027 periods led to significant delays, which hindered the proper implementation of EU programmes; insists, therefore, that every effort be made to ensure timely adoption of the upcoming MFF package;

    134. Expects the Commission, as part of the package of MFF proposals, to put forward a new IIA in line with the realities of the new budget, including with respect to the management of contingent liabilities; stresses that the changes to the Financial Regulation necessary for alignment with the new MFF should enter into force at the same time as the MFF Regulation;

    135. Instructs its President to forward this resolution to the Council and the Commission.

    MIL OSI Europe News